Dokumendiregister | Riigi IT Keskus |
Viit | 5-3/24-0026-1 |
Registreeritud | 26.01.2024 |
Sünkroonitud | 31.03.2024 |
Liik | Leping |
Funktsioon | 5 Riigihanked ja lepingute haldus |
Sari | 5-3 Lepingud juriidiliste isikutega ja asutustega, aktid, aruanded |
Toimik | 5-3 Lepingud juriidiliste isikutega ja asutustega, aktid, aruanded |
Juurdepääsupiirang | Avalik |
Juurdepääsupiirang | |
Adressaat | |
Saabumis/saatmisviis | |
Vastutaja | Risto Seegel |
Originaal | Ava uues aknas |
Lisa 1
OSA 4: HANKE ESEME TEHNILINE KIRJELDUS (A3 KLASS 2)
Raamleping ühe pakkujaga
1. Üldosa
1.1. Riigihange korraldatakse:
1.1.1 Printerite ja lisatoodete (edaspidi nimetatud ka kui: asjad) väljaostmiseks (asja omandamise
õigusega),
1.1.2 asjade rentimiseks (ilma asja omandamise õiguseta).
1.2. Asjadega seotud lisateenused, mis on asja hinnas:
1.2.1 asjade kohaletoomine (transport),
1.2.2 renditavate asjade tagastamine jne.
2. Hankelepingu eseme tehnilise kirjelduse lugemine
2.1. Iga viidet, mille hankija teeb käesolevas dokumendis mõnele riigihangete seaduse paragrahvi 88
lõikes 2 ja paragrahvi 89 lõikes 1 nimetatud alusele, kui pakkumuse tehnilise kirjelduse vastavuse
kriteeriumile, tuleb lugeda selliselt, et see on täiendatud märkega „või sellega samaväärne“.
2.2. Iga viidet, mille hankija teeb käesolevas dokumendis ostuallikale, protsessile, kaubamärgile,
patendile, tüübile, päritolule või tootmisviisile ning märgisele tuleb lugeda selliselt, et see on
täiendatud märkega „või sellega samaväärne“.
3. Hangitavatele asjadele kehtivad üldised tingimused ja nõuded
3.1. Hanke esemeks on punktis 8 nimetatud printerite ja lisatoodete ostmine või rentimine ja punktis 5
kirjeldatud täishooldusteenuse lisamise võimalus hankega ostetud või renditud printeritele.
3.2. Iga asi (nii printer kui ka selle juurde kuuluv lisatoode ja –komponent) peab olema uus (eelnevalt
kasutamata) ja töötama tootja poolt ettenähtud viisil. Asjana ei käsitleta tarkvara, selle litsentsi või
muid õigusi.
3.3. Kõikide samasuguste asjade komponendid ja samasugused asjad tervikuna peavad olema läbivalt
toodetud sama tootja poolt ja neile peab olema omistatud sama tootekood (ingl. k. part number), v.a
juhul kui asja tootmine lõppeb.
3.4. Printeri mudeli vahetus on lubatav ainult juhul, kui printeri tootmine lõppeb (end of life – EOL).
Põhihankijat (RIT) tuleb sellest teavitada 30 päeva ette ning selle 30 päeva jooksul peab olema
võimaldatud veel vanade mudelite tellimine, välja arvatud juhul, kui hankija on aktsepteerinud
lühemat tähtaega. Hankija sellekohasel soovil esitab pakkuja testseadme punktis 3.12 nimetatud
tähtajal. Nimetatud tähtaega on võimalik muuta kokkuleppel hankijaga. Mudeli vahetuseks esitab
pakkuja kas pakkumusega samaväärse või paremate näitajatega mudeli.
3.5. Punkti 3.4 tingimustel mudeli vahetuse muutmisavalduse kinnitab põhihankija e-kataloogis (RHS
§ 123 lg 1 p 2 alusel (põhjendatud juhul ka p 7 alusel)), kui põhihankija pärast kontrollimist veendub,
et tegu on pakkumusega samaväärse või paremate näitajatega mudeliga. Taolist kinnitust loetakse
lepingu muudatuseks ja teisi kirjalikke lepingu muudatusi ei vormistata. Kui lisatoote tootmine lõpeb
või mudeli vahetus tingib lisatoodete vahetuse järgitakse samu põhimõtteid.
3.6. Printerid peavad olema hallatavad ühe haldustarkvaraga, mis peab sisalduma pakkumuses.
3.7. Printerid ning nende juurde kuuluvad lisaseadmed ja –komponendid peavad olema komplekteeritud
sama pakkuja poolt.
3.8. Igal hankijal peab olema pakkumuste avamisest alates võimalik kontrollida tootja poolselt avalikult
ja anonüümselt ligipääsetavalt veebilehelt pakutavate asjade detailset tehnilist kirjeldust.
2 / 8
3.9. Pakkumus peab sisaldama printerite täielikku tootja spetsifikatsiooni. Lisatoodete spetsifikatsioon
lisada nende olemasolul. Tootja spetsifikatsiooni all käsitleb hankija tootja poolset tooteinfot
pakutava asja osas. Kogu info asja kohta, sh asja spetsifikatsioon, peab sisalduma e-kataloogis.
3.10. E-kataloogi sisestatud printeri pealkiri peab sisaldama sõna „printer“ ning printeri nimetust. Lisaks
peab asja info juures esitama toote mudeli, tootekoodi, samuti tuleb ära märkida tarkvara tootja
tootekood, hinna jm näitajad, mis on kirjeldatud dokumendi „Pakkumuse koostamine e-kataloogis“
punktides 3 ja 4.
3.11. Kõik printerid ja tarkvara peavad olema pakkumuse esitamise ajal tootja ametlikus avalikus toodete
nimekirjas.
3.12. Pakkuja kohustub hankemenetluse käigus põhihankija soovil tooma testimiseks pakutud printeri 14
kalendripäeva jooksul pärast põhihankija sellekohase taotluse esitamist.
3.13. Hankija võib ostetavate printerite hankelepingu raames lisaks tellida tehnilise hoolduse- ja
remonditöid ehk printeri tootja originaalkulutarvikut sisaldava täishooldusteenuse. Hankijal on
võimalik soetada ning pakkujal on kohustus pakkuda täishooldusteenust alates asjade tarnimisest.
3.14. Tarneaeg on välja toodud hankelepingu üldtingimuste p 5.7.
4. Maksumus
4.1. Pakkumuse maksumuse esitamisel peab olema arvestatud kõigi hanke alusdokumentides seatud
tingimustega.
5. Printeri tootja originaalkulutarvikut sisaldav täishooldusteenus
5.1. Kõikidele ostetavatele asjadele saab hankija sellekohase soovi korral tellida printeri tootja
originaalkulutarvikut sisaldava täishooldusteenuse paketi (edaspidi „täishooldusteenus“).
Renditavatele asjadele on täishooldusteenuse paketi tellimine kohustuslik.
5.2. Kõikidele renditavatele asjadele peab hankija tellima printeri tootja originaalkulutarvikut sisaldava
täishooldusteenuse paketi.
5.3. Täishooldusteenus hõlmab endas asjade tehnilist ja korralist hooldust ja remonti ning kõiki
originaalkulutarvikuid (tooner/tint, rullikud, trumlid, ahi, tahmakogur jne. välja arvatud paber ja
klambrid). Tehniline hooldus tähendab vastavalt asjade tehnilise dokumentatsiooni nõuetele ja tootja
poolt kehtestatud ekspluatatsiooninormidele teostatavaid profülaktilisi töid, kulumaterjalide
tarnimist ning asjade puhastust. Korralise hoolduse eesmärk on ennetada asjade võimalikke rikkeid.
Remont tähendab asja(de)l ilmnenud defektide kõrvaldamist ja defektseks muutunud osade
asendamist uutega.
5.4. Täishooldusteenuse raames peab pakkuja teostama tarvikute monitooringut/kaughaldust, varustama
printereid õigeaegselt vastava printeri tootja originaalkulutarvikutega ja tootja garantii raames
originaalvaruosadega, sh kõikide hooldussõlmedega (ahjusõlmed, paberkandja söötmise rullid,
dokumendisöötja jms). Kõik hooldussõlmed peavad sisalduma täishooldusteenuse lehekülje hinnas
ja selle eest hankijale eraldi arvet ei esitata.
5.5. Printeri tõrgeteta töö tagamine on täishooldusteenuse raames pakkuja vastutada. Täishooldusteenuse
raames tuleb uus originaalkulutarvik tarnida printeri täpsesse asukohta koos saatelehega, millel on
viidatud konkreetsele printerile, sellise ajavaruga, et printeri töö ei katkeks. Tühjeneva toonerikasseti
ja ressurssi minetava hooldussõlme info peab pakkuja saama enda poolt hankija juurde paigaldatud
monitoorimissüsteemist.
5.6. Täishooldusteenuse korral teostatakse kõik hooldus- ja remonditööd pakkuja või tema volitatud
esindaja poolt asja asukohas hankija juures. Kui asja (printeri) töökorda saamine ei ole hankija
asukohas võimalik, tagatakse pakkuja poolt asendusseade.
3 / 8
5.7. Täishooldusteenuse kestuseks on 48 kuud.
5.8. Hankija vastava soovi korral on pakkuja kohustatud kleebisega märgistama täishooldusteenuses
hõlmatud printerid. Kleebiselt peab olema välja loetav, et antud seade on täishooldusteenuse all,
rendi lõpu kuupäev või ostu puhul täishooldusteenuse lõpu kuupäev ja ka kontaktandmed, kelle poole
antud printeri probleemidega pöörduda. Info võib olla eraldi kleebistel.
5.9. Kui pakkuja ei ole teostanud oma initsiatiivil täishooldusteenuse raames printeri hooldust, on
hankijal õigus kutsuda pakkuja hooldama printerit selle eest eraldi tasu maksmata. Pakkuja on
kohustatud teostama hoolduse vähemalt 10 päeva jooksul hankija vastava kutse saamisest.
6. Printerite monitooring
6.1. Asjade monitooring ja tugiteenus rakendub ainult sellisel juhul, kui hankija valib asja koos
täishooldusteenusega.
6.2. Pakkuja kasutab hankija juurde paigaldatavat asjade monitoorimissüsteemi, mis võimaldab asjade
monitoorimist kaughalduse teel, sh tarvikute ja tehniliste rikete monitoorimist.
6.3. Hankija võimaldab edastada monitooringukeskusesse vähemalt järgmised andmed: asja kirjeldus ja
mudel, kõikide tarvikute staatus, seerianumber, asja printimis- ja koopianäidud, asja asukoht,
veakoodid.
6.4. Keelatud on edastada või pakkuja poolselt töödelda isikuandmeid ning kasutajaandmeid.
6.5. Pakkuja teostab asjade 24x7 monitooringut täishooldusteenuse tõrgeteta toimimise eesmärgil.
Monitoorimissüsteemi tööaeg on 24/7. Täishooldusteenuse osutamiseaeg 8:00-18:00 tööpäeviti,
seejuures riketele ja teadetele reageerimine 2 tunni jooksul alates teate saabumisest hankija esindajalt
või monitoorimissüsteemilt.
6.6. Asja töövõime taastamine või asendusasja paigaldus peab toimuma hiljemalt rikkele järgneval
tööpäeval.
6.7. Pakkuja kohustub tarnima kõik vajaminevad tootja originaalkulutarvikud (tooner, trummel, ahi jm
kasutaja poolt vahetatavad tarvikud, va paber ja klambrid) selliselt, et asja töövõime ei katkeks
kulutarviku ressursi lõppemise tõttu.
6.8. Hankija ei vastuta kulutarvikute monitoorimise eest ja ei ole kohustatud vajaminevate kulutarvikute
tellimusi esitama. Asja vajalike kulutarvikute jmt olemasolu ja asja töökorrasolek hankija asukohas
peab olema tagatud pakkuja poolt.
6.9. Tarkvarauuendused ja vajalikud asutusesisesed seadistused teeb hankija. Kui pakkuja ei võimalda
hankijal tarkvara uuenduste tegemist, siis on ta kohustatud hankija soovil need ise tegema, ilma
lisatasu küsimata.
6.10. Pakkuja võib volitada asju hooldama kolmandaid isikuid. Vastavate isikute andmed märgitakse
hankelepingusse.
6.11. Lokaalprinterite monitoorimiseks võimaldab hankija paigaldada arvutitesse pakkuja poolt soovitud
lisatarkvara, mis on eelnevalt hankija poolt heakskiidetud.
7. Garantii
7.1. Täpsemalt garantiitingimused vt hankelepingu üldtingimuste p 17.
8. Tehnilised ja keskkonnasäästlikkuse tingimused
8.1. Tingimused printerite keskkonnasäästlikkusele:
Tingimuse kirjeldus
Kõik pakutud printerid peavad olema „CE marking“ sertifitseeritud.
4 / 8
Kõik pakutud printerid peavad vastama RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) direktiivile.
Kõik pakutud printerid peavad vastama WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) direktiivile.
Üheski pakutud printeris ei tohi olla kasutatud SCCP tuld vaigistavate ühendite ja plastilisust parandavate
toksiliste lahusteid, välja arvatud juhul kui antud ühendite olemasolu printeris on õigustatud taaskasutatud
materjalide kasutamisega.
Üheski pakutud printeris ei tohi suuremates plastosades kasutada eurodirektiivi 67/548/EEC alusel
ohtlikeks tunnistatud tuld vaigistavaid aineid ja ühendeid.
Kõikide pakutud printeri komponendid või osad, mis sisaldavad keskkonnaohtlikke või
tervistkahjustavaid aineid või ühendeid, näiteks PCB-d, peavad olema lihtsalt äratuntavad ja
eemaldatavad.
Pakendites ei tohi olla kasutatud mürgiseid aineid, sh. raskemetalle, välja arvatud juhul kui tegemist on
taaskasutatud materjalidega.
Kõik pakendi osad, mida ei saa taaskasutada või ei ole biolagunevad, peavad olema käsitsi eraldatavad
osadest, mida saab taaskasutada või on biolagunevad.
8.2. Tingimused ühilduvusele
Tingimuse kirjeldus
Kõik pakutud printerid peavad olema sertifitseeritud Windows 10 "Windows Hardware Compatibility
List" nimekirjas välja arvatud juhul, kui printeri tootmist on alustatud vähem kui 1 aasta tagasi.
Kõigi pakutud printerite printimiskeel peab olema vähemalt PCL6 ja Postscript 3 ning ühilduvus
vähemalt operatsioonisüsteemidega Microsoft Windows 10 (32/64 bit) ja uuemad.
Printerite jagamiseks peab sobima Microsoft Windows Server 2019 või uuem.
Printerite universaalajuri kasutamise võimalus, peab toetama terminaliserverist Microsoft Windows
Server 2019 (64-bit) või uuem printimist.
Multifunktsionaalsed printerid peavad töötama Microsoft Windows Server 2019 (64-bit) või uuem
domeeni keskkonnas st. peab saama skaneerida vähemalt üle SMB2 protokolli domeeni liikmeks olevale
failserverile, kasutamata selleks lisatarkvara.
Juhul kui hankija soovib ning edastab pakkujale enne printerite tarnet vajalikud parameetrid printerite
ettevalmistamiseks võrku ühendiseks (IP aadress ja muud seadistused) kohustub pakkuja vastavad
häälestused tegema kas enne printeri hankija juurde toimetamist või tulema hankija juurde neid tegema.
8.3. Tingimused klass 2 (A3 multifunktsionaalne väikse koormusega värviline printer) kuuluvale
printerile
Nimetus Tingimuse kirjeldus
5 / 8
Baasandmed: Laser, Led või tint
paberi formaat kõikidest sisenditest vähemalt A4 ja A5
paberi formaat vähemalt ühest sahtlist A3 ja vähemalt ühest sahtlist A4R
A3 ja A5 sahtlid peavad olema eraldi
vähemalt üks korpuse sisene sõltumatu paberisahtel mahutavusega vähemalt 500
lehte kokku
käsisöödu liides
kahepoolne printimine (standardne duplex)
lehe kaal vähemalt kuni 220 g/m2
puutetundlik LCD kasutajaliides, minimaalselt 7“ ekraaniga, mis võib olla
integreeritud või printerile kinnitatav kasutajasõbralikul kujul (lihtsasti
ligipääsetav- ja kasutatav)
seade ei oma korpusest püsivalt väljaulatuvaid plastist paberijuhte ja hoidikuid jm
kergelt murduvaid või lahtisi elemente
Funktsionaalsus: automaatne kahepoolne originaalisöötur vähemalt 50 lehele
võrguühendustest sõltumatu kopeerimine
värviskaneerimine
dokumentide faksimise lisamise võimalus
kasutajakoodide seadistamine koopiafunktsioonile
skaneeritud dokumentide (Job Preview) eelvaade printeri juhtpaneelilt
tootja deklareeritud esimese lehe väljatrükk A4 lehe printimisele 'time to first
print' <= 10s
Jõudlus: 8-bit halltoonide tugi
24-bit värviulatus
naturaalne kopeerimise resolutsioon vähemalt 600 x 600dpi
naturaalne skaneerimise resolutsioon vähemalt 600 x 600dpi
Laser ja Led naturaalne printimise resolutsioon vähemalt 1200 x 1200dpi, Tindi
naturaalne printimise resolutsioon vähemalt 600 x 2400dpi
operatiivmälu vähemalt 2GB
Printimise kiirus vähemalt 30 A4 lk minutis (mustvalge)
Printimise kiiruse vähemalt 30 A4 lk minutis (värviline)
Kopeerimise kiirus vähemalt 30 A4 lk minutis ISO 24734 järgi
Skaneerimise kiirus vähemalt 40 A4 lk minutis ISO 24734 järgi
kuukoormus vähemalt 7000
integreeritud TCP/IP toega printserver 10/100/1000 ethernet liides
Kulumaterjalid: Toonerikasseti vahetuse tsükkel vähemalt 7 500 lehekülge värviline, deklareeritud
vastavalt ISO/IEC 19798 või ISO/IEC 24711
Toonerikasseti vahetuse tsükkel vähemalt 10 00 lehekülge mustvalge,
deklareeritud vastavalt ISO/IEC 19798 või ISO/IEC 24711
võtmekomponentide ja kulumaterjalide varuosadena saadavus peab olema tagatud
vähemalt 4 aasta jooksul pärast vastava mudeli tootmise lõpetamist
6 / 8
Skaneerimise
tugi ja ajur:
otse TCP/IP võrku skaneerimine
skaneerimise töö loomise võimekus (Scan Job, WorkFlow või samaväärne)
SMTP
SMB
FTP teenustele koos autentimise ja Microsoft AD/LDAP päringutega
toetatud formaadid: vähemalt PDF, TIFF, JPEG
Mõõdud: kõrgus mitte suurem kui 1300 mm
Turvalisus: krüpteeritud püsimälu, riistvaralise krüpteerimise lisamise võimalus
peab võimaldama turvalist PIN koodiga printimist
peavad ühilduma printeri turvaseadistusi (paroolid, juurdepääsusertifikaadid,
veebiteenused, printeri tuvastus- ja võrguteenused, SNMP, prindiprotokollid jms)
tsentraalset haldava tarkvaraga, mis võimaldaks ühtsete turvapoliitikate
koostamist, nende automaatset rakendamist printerite võrku ühendamisel ning
turvapoliitikatega vastavuse pidevat jälgimist või hankija poolt määratud
intervalli tagant uuendamist ning raporteerimist. Haldamiseks kasutatav tarkvara
ei pea sisalduma pakkumise hinnas, kuid peab olema kasutusvalmis ja pakkuja
poolt vajadusel demonstreeritav käesoleva hanke raames pakutavatel kõikide
klasside printeritel
Ühilduvus: vähemalt USB 2.0 liides
USB-välkmälult printimine. Vastav USB liides peab asuma nähtaval ja lihtsasti
ligipääsetaval kohal (esipaneelil, küljel). USB liides ei tohi asuda „peidetuna“ nt
kaane all ega printeri tagaküljel. Tagaküljeks loeb hankija külge, kus asub printeri
ühendus vooluvõrguga jmt"
USB 2.0 'host' liides väliste printerite (ID kaardi lugeja, RFID kaardid jmt)
ühendamiseks ja täielikult toimimiseks. Väliste seadmete ühendamine printeriga
peab olema hankija jaoks tasuta, st kui printeri poolelt on ühendamiseks vajalik
täiendavate tarkvarade ja/või litsentside olemasolu vmt, peab see sisalduma
pakkumuse maksumuses. Kui tulenevalt printeri tootja poolsetest nõuetest, võib
väliseid printerid ühendada ainult printeri tootja esindaja/pakkuja, siis peab
pakkumuse maksumus sisaldama ka vastavaid paigaldusi. Pakkujal peab olema
valmisolek vastavate paigalduste teostamiseks kogu lepingu kehtivuse perioodil
Ühilduvus kõikide järgnevalt nimetatud turvalise printimise tarkvaradega: SafeQ,
SafeCom, Equitrac, Papercut, MYQ, UniFlow. Ühilduvus nimetatud
tarkvaraga ei pea olema juhul kui printeri tootmist on alustatud vähem kui 1 aasta
tagasi ning kolmanda osapoole tarkvara ei ole valmis uue printeriga ühilduma.
Sellisel juhul esitab pakkuja kas printeri tootja või kolmanda osapoole kinnituse
ning omapoolse kirjelduse ühilduvuse osas millest peab nähtuma, kuidas on
planeeritud saavutada ühildavus peale seda kui 1 a periood alates tootmise
algusest läbi saab
Printer peab toetama eelnevas alapunktis nimetatud tarkvarasid ja peab olema
ilma täiendava terminalita, sh kasutajate autentimine eesti ID kaardiga ning
erinevate RFID kaartidega, „pull print/follow me“. Kui tulenevalt printeri tootja
poolsetest nõuetest, võib turvalise printimise tarkvara seadistusi teostada ainult
printeri tootja esindaja/pakkuja, siis peab pakkumuse maksumus sisaldama ka
vastavaid seadistamisi. Pakkujal peab olema valmisolek vastavate seadistuste
teostamiseks kogu lepingu kehtivuse perioodil
RFID peab toetama Microsoft AD/LDAP autentimist
7 / 8
Haldus: HTTPS põhine monitooring ja kaughaldus
SNMP (v1, v2, v3)
DHCP
802.1x autentimise tugi
IPv4 ja IPv6/IPSec
seadete muutmine peab olema võimalik vaid administraatori PIN koodi/parooli
kasutades
hinnas sisalduv või tasuta marsruuditav TCP/IP võrgu kaudu reaalajas
monitooringu ja halduse tarkvara
8.4. Juurde tellitavad lisatooted
Antud lisasid on võimalik tellida koos printeri soetusega, kuid mitte hiljem. e-kataloogis tuleb antud lisad
tootena või teenusena sisestades märkida „lisatooteks/-teenuseks“ ning siduda need pakutavate
põhitoodetega.
Nimetus Tingimuse kirjeldus
Tootja garantii 3 aastat printeri välja ostmisel hankelepingu üldtingimused punktis 17.5 nõutava
tootja garantii asendamine 3-aastase tootja garantiiga
Täishooldusteenus 48.
kuuks
tootja originaaltoonerit sisaldav tähishooldusteenuse pakett, mida on
võimalik rakendada nii printeri ostmisel kui rentimisel
A3 klass 2 printeri
klammerdamist ja
sorteerimist võimaldav
viimistleja
A3 klass 2 printerile sobiv tootja poolt spetsifitseeritud dokumentide
klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja
A3 klass 2 printeri
klammerdamist,
sorteerimist ja
augustamist võimaldav
viimistleja
A3 klass 2 printerile sobiv tootja poolt spetsifitseeritud dokumentide
klammerdamist, augustamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja
Printeri püsimälu
tagastamata jätmise ja
iseseisvalt hävitamise
õigus
Hankija õigus garantiiperioodi kestel või rendiperioodi lõppemisel mitte
tagastada ja iseseisvalt hävitada renditava printeri püsimälu. Kui püsimälu
ei saa emaplaadilt eemaldada, kehtib kogu emaplaadi kohta. Püsimälu
omandiõigus hankijale üle ei lähe. Kehtib ka välja ostetud printeri
garantiijuhtumi puhul.
Aluskapp ratastel liigutatav
8.4.1 Põhitoote „printer müügiks“ juurde tuleb lisada alljärgnevad punktis 8.4 tingimustele
vastavad lisatooted:
1) tootja garantii 3 aastat;
2) täishooldusteenus 48. kuuks;
3) A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja;
4) A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja;
5) printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus;
6) aluskapp.
8.4.2 Põhitoote „printer rendiks“ juurde tuleb lisada alljärgnevad punktis 8.4 tingimustele vastavad
lisatooted:
8 / 8
1) täishooldusteenus 48. kuuks;
2) A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja;
3) A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja;
4) printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus;
5) aluskapp.
Lisa 2
HANKELEPINGU ÜLDTINGIMUSED
1. Üldosa
1.1 Üldtingimused on riigihanke tulemusel sõlmitud raamlepingu lisa, hankelepingu lahutamatuks
osaks ning pooltele täitmiseks kohustuslikud.
1.2 Pooled võivad hankelepingu eritingimustes kokku leppida üldtingimustes käsitlemata või
üldtingimusi täpsustavates küsimustes, kui vastav võimalus on raamlepingus ja selle lisades ette
nähtud, samuti erisusi üldtingimustest, kuid nende puudumisel kohaldatakse üldtingimusi.
Üldtingimuste ja eritingimustes sisalduvate sätete vastuolu korral, loetakse ülimuslikuks
eritingimustes sätestatu. Kui kontekst seda nõuab, tähendavad ainsuses olevad sõnad
üldtingimustes mitmust ja vastupidi.
1.3 Hankelepingu sõlmimisel eraldi sissemakset ei tehta ja lepingutasu ei maksta.
2. Mõisted
2.1. Mõisted laienevad nii hankelepingule kui ka selle osaks olevatele dokumentidele.
2.1.1. Pooled – tellija ja täitja ühise nimetusega.
2.1.2. Üldtingimused – käesolevad hankelepingu üldtingimused. Kui üldtingimustes ei ole
fikseeritud teisiti, tähendavad üldtingimustes viidatud punktid vastavaid üldtingimuste
punkte.
2.1.3. Leping – hankelepingu eri- ja üldtingimused koos lisadega või raamlepingus toodud
juhtudel tellimus hankelepingu üldtingimustega kogumis. Üldtingimuste kontekstis
lühendatud terminiga leping.
2.1.4. Riigihanke alusdokumendid – riigihangete seaduse kohaselt tellija poolt läbiviidava
hankemenetlusega seonduv dokumentatsioon. Riigihanke alusdokumendid
moodustavad lepingu lahutamatu osa.
2.1.5. Asi – võib koosneda eraldi või koosolevalt alljärgnevast:
2.1.5.1. tarkvarast, mis tähendab põhiliselt arvutiprogramme, telekommunikatsioone,
andmebaasi-, rakendus- ja muud tarkvara objektikoodis, lähtekoodis või nende mistahes
muid vorme või adaptsioone koos sellega seonduva dokumentatsiooniga.
2.1.5.2. seadmetest, mis tähendavad lepingus kirjeldatud asju, hõlmates nendega otseselt seotud
tarkvara, mis on vajalik asja funktsioneerimiseks ning nende kohta koostatud kirjalikke
või kirjalikku taasesitamist võimaldavas vormis koostatud dokumente.
2.1.5.3. telekommunikatsioonidest, mis tähendavad sisemise ja välise telekommunikatsiooni
seadmeid, tarkvara ja teenuseid ning vajalikke vahendeid, teenuseid ja protseduure.
2.1.5.4. tarkvara, seadmete või telekommunikatsioonide paigaldamiseks või seadistamiseks
tehtavatest töödest.
2.1.5.5. asjade detailne sisu on kokku lepitud hanke eseme tehnilises kirjelduses, tellija
pakkumuse esitamise ettepanekus jm lepingu oluliseks osaks ja lisaks olevates
dokumentides.
2.1.6. Täishooldusteenus – Täishooldusteenus hõlmab endas asjade tehnilist ja korralist
hooldust ja remonti ning kõiki originaalkulutarvikuid (tooner/tint, rullikud, trumlid, ahi,
tahmakogur jne. Välja arvatud paber ja klambrid). Tehniline hooldus tähendab vastavalt
asjade tehnilise dokumentatsiooni nõuetele ja tootja poolt kehtestatud
ekspluatatsiooninormidele teostatavaid profülaktilisi töid, kulumaterjalide tarnimist
ning asjade puhastust. Korralise hoolduse eesmärk on ennetada asjade võimalikke
rikkeid. Remont tähendab asja(de)l ilmnenud defektide kõrvaldamist ja defektseks
muutunud osade asendamist uutega.
2 / 11
2.1.7. Kasutusrent – asjade rentimine koos tarkvara litsentsidega rendiperioodiks. Asjade
omandamise kohustust rendiperioodi lõpus ei teki.
2.1.8. Rendiperiood – Rendiperioodi arvestatakse täiskuudes. Rendiperiood algab asjade
vastuvõtuakti allkirjastamisele järgnevast kalendrikuust ja kestab 48 kuud.
2.1.9. Asukoht – asukoht tähendab tellija asukohta või muud kokkulepitud kohta, välja
arvatud täitja asukoht, kuhu asi tarnitakse või installeeritakse või teenuseid osutatakse.
2.1.10. Puudus ja viga – puuduse või veaga on tegemist juhul, kui asi ei täida lepingus
sätestatud funktsioone, annab valesid tulemusi, kui tema nõuetekohane toimimine
katkeb või on (muul viisil) häiritud, nii et asja otstarbekohane kasutamine on takistatud
või oluliselt häiritud.
2.1.11. Tehingu alusdokument – raamleping koos tellimusega (tellimus ilma kirjaliku
hankelepingu sõlmimiseta) või raamleping ja tellimus ning hankeleping (kirjaliku
hankelepingu sõlmimisel).
2.1.12. Tööpäev – tööpäevana käsitletakse kalendripäeva, mis ei ole kas laupäev, pühapäev või
rahvuspüha või riigipüha, pühade ja tähtpäevade seaduse tähenduses.
3. Hind ja maksmine
3.1. Lepingujärgne hind sisaldab (lisaks hankelepingus sätestatud asjade ostuhinnale ja/või
kasutusrendi maksetele ning lisateenuste hinnale) asjade kohale toomist, paigaldamist, asjade
toimimiseks vajalike litsentside maksumust, pakendite ja andmekandjate kohest utiliseerimist ja
tellija soovil asja kasutamise koolitust Eesti Vabariigi piires (tellijal on õigus nõuda koolitust ja
utiliseerimist konkreetse paigaldatud asja juures), samuti kõiki makse, välja arvatud käibemaks.
3.2. Lepingujärgne hind väljendatakse eurodes.
3.3. Lepingujärgne hind on täitja ainuke tasu ostetud või renditud asjade ja/või teenuste eest seoses
lepinguga, mh ei ole täitjal ega tema töötajatel õigust täiendavale autori, litsentsi- või muule
sarnasele tasule seoses lepingu täitmisel kasutatud patenteeritud või muul viisil kaitstud eseme
või protsessiga.
3.4. Täishooldusteenuse hind katab täishooldusteenuse perioodi jooksul kõik asjadele tehtavad
kulutused, välja arvatud koopiapaber, klammerdaja klambrid ja elektrienergia.
Täishooldusteenuse hinnas on kaetud tootja originaalkulutarvikute (tooner, hooldussõlmed jms),
originaalvaruosade, teeninduse (sh monitoorimine), remondi- ja originaalkulutarvikute
kohaletoimetamise (transpordi) ja tühjade toonerikassettide äraveo ning utiliseerimise maksumus.
Täishooldusteenuse hinda arvestatakse prinditud ja kopeeritud lehekülgede arvu alusel.
3.5. Täitja esitab tellijale arve(d) masinloetaval kujul e-arvena. Arve(d) esitatakse pärast vastuvõtuakti
allkirjastamist või täishooldusteenuse aruande kinnitamist tellija poolt. Asjade kasutusrendi eest
esitab täitja tellijale arved rendiperioodi eest, võrdsetes osades jaotatuna täiskuudeks, üks kord
kvartalis (I kvartal jaanuar- märts, II kvartal aprill-juuni jne). Täitja võib esitada arve varasemalt
kvartali esimesel kuul (nt kui arve esitatakse I kvartali eest, siis võib arve esitada jaanuaris).
Täishooldusteenuse arve esitab täitja kasutusrendi arvest eraldi üks kord kalendrikuus.
3.6. Tellijal on õigus nõuda, et täitja esitaks eraldiseisvad e-arved asjade soetuse või kasutusrendi ja
täishooldusteenuse kohta ning erinevate tarneaadresside lõikes.
3.7. Juhul kui hankija on lisanud e-katlaoogi tellimuse väljale „kommentaar arvel“ info, tuleb see info
kajastada vastaval arvel. Kui viimast ei ole võimalik (koond)arvel välja tuua, siis edastada vastav
info eraldi exceli failina kus on eraldi ridadena nähtavad nii seadmed kui sellega seonduvad
kommentaarid.
3.8. E-arve peab sisaldama vähemalt alljärgnevaid andmeid:
3.8.1. info e-arve esitaja kohta;
3.8.2. info maksja kohta;
3 / 11
3.8.3. kirjaliku hankelepingu sõlmimisel hankelepingu number;
3.8.4. info perioodi osas, mille eest arve esitati;
3.8.5. e-kataloogi tellimuse number;
3.8.6. raamlepingu number;
3.8.7. raamlepingu aluseks oleva riigihanke viitenumber;
3.8.8. täishooldusteenuse arvel lepingu osa viitenumber;
3.8.9. tarneaadress(id) asjade kaupa;
3.8.10. juhul, kui tehingu alusdokumendis on märgitud, siis asutuse nimetus, kuhu asjad
tarnitakse;
3.8.11. välisvahendite alusel asjade soetusel ka viide vastavale projektile. Tellija kohustub
märkima vajaliku viite tehingu alusdokumendis.
3.8.12. käibemaksukohustuslase number;
3.8.13. vastuvõetud asja nimetus, seerianumber ja kirjeldus;
3.8.14. summa käibemaksuta;
3.8.15. käibemaks;
3.8.16. kogusumma.
3.9. Arve maksetähtaeg ei tohi olla lühem kui 30 kalendripäeva, v.a kui välisvahendite kaasamise tõttu
on ettenähtud teistsugune maksetähtaeg. Erisused maksetähtaja osas sätestatakse hankelepingu
eritingimustesse.
3.10. Vajadusel sätestatakse kõik vahemaksed maksegraafikus, mis kinnitatakse lepingu lisana.
3.11. Ettemakseid tellija ei teosta.
3.12. Tellija poolt makstud mistahes summa, mis ületab täitjale lepingus ettenähtu, maksab täitja
tellijale tagasi 30 kalendripäeva jooksul pärast vastava teate saamist.
3.13. Lepingujärgse hinna tasumisega viivitamisel on täitjal õigus nõuda tellijalt viivist iga maksmisega
viivitatud kalendripäeva eest 0,15 (null koma viisteist) % maksmata summast kalendripäevas.
4. Informatsioon ja aruanded
4.1. Täitja loetakse asukohaga ja lepingu tingimustega tutvunuks. Eelkõige ei rahuldata täitja nõuet
lisamakseteks või ajapikenduseks, kui ta oleks saanud vajaliku informatsiooni hankida visiidiga
asukohta, konsulteerides tellijaga või muul sobilikul viisil.
4.2. Niipea kui võimalik, varustab tellija täitjat tema käsutuses oleva mistahes informatsiooni ja
dokumentatsiooniga, mis võib olla lepingu täitmisel oluline.
4.3. Tellija abistab täitjat nii palju kui võimalik lepingusse puutuva informatsiooni saamisel, mida
täitja mõistlikkuse piirides lepingu täitmiseks nõuda võib.
4.4. Täitja annab tellijale viimase nõudmisel igal ajal lepingu täitmist (sealhulgas asju, projekti
kulgemist ja teenuseid) puudutavat informatsiooni.
5. Asjade kohaletoomise ja üleandmise tingimused
5.1. Iga asi tuuakse selle eest eraldi tasu maksmata kohale ja antakse üle tellija kontaktisikule tellija
määratud kohas Eestis sh transport toimub hankija poolt tellimuses või lepingus määratletud
korrusele.
5.2. Tarkvara ning lisaseadmed ja –komponendid antakse üle samaaegselt printeriga. Asja ekspordi ja
EL- sisese käibe puhul (nt edastamisel välisesindustesse) märgitakse lepingusse tarneaadress ning
saatetoimingud ja -kulud lepitakse eraldi kokku hankelepingu eritingimustes.
5.3. Kõikide originaalkulutarvikute tarne Eesti Vabariigi piires ning kasutatud originaalkulutarvikute
transport ning utiliseerimine Eesti Vabariigi piires peab olema hankijale ilma lisakuludeta.
4 / 11
5.4. Samaaegselt üle antavate asjade nimekiri ja üleandmise koht sätestatakse pakkumuse esitamise
ettepanekus või hankelepingu eritingimustes või tellimuses.
5.5. Kõik soetatud printerid tuleb täitjal tähtaegselt tarnida asja lõplikku asukohta, paigaldada tellija
soovil vooluvõrku ning vajadusel ka arvutivõrku ühendada. Paigalduse käigus tuleb tellija soovil
printeritele peale panna viimane püsivara. Printerid tarnitakse koos saatelehega, millel on viidatud
konkreetsele printerile.
5.6. Enne asjade kohaletoomist edastatakse tellijale elektrooniliselt andmed iga üleantava printeri (v.a.
selle juurde kuuluvad tarkavara ja lisaseadmed ning komponendid) kohta elektrooniliselt csv
(commaseparated values) formaadis. Edastatavad andmed on:
5.6.1. mudel;
5.6.2. seerianumber;
5.6.3. võrgukaardi MAC aadress;
5.6.4. tarneaadress.
5.7. Printerite ja lisatoodete tarnetähtaeg koos paigaldusega on 4 nädalat alates hankelepingu
sõlmimisest või tellimuse esitamisest. Kirjaliku lepingu sõlmimise korral arvestatakse tarneaega
alates tellija poolt allkirjastatud lepingu kättesaamise päevale järgnevast tööpäevast, muul juhul
tellimuse esitamisele järgnevast tööpäevast. Pooled lepivad kokku, et täitja on tellija poolt
allkirjastatud lepingu kätte saanud täitja kontaktisiku e-posti aadressile edastamisele järgneval
päeval. Täitja informeerib eelnevalt tellijat asja tarnimise täpsest ajast.
5.8. Asja üleandmisel allkirjastab täitja üleandmise akti, milles näitab ära üleandmise kuupäeva ja
asukoha, rendiperioodi algust ja lõppu ning rendi igakuiste osamaksete suurust (võrdsetes
perioodimaksetes), osutatud teenuste ja tarnitud asjade detailiseeritud nimekirja ning vajaduse
korral neis esinevad puudused. /Asja üleandmise-vastuvõtmise akti näidis (alla laetav
riigihangete registrist link: https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-
info ) Hanke alusandmed - Dokumendid -Lisa 9 Akt) (tellijal on õigus kasutada oma akti projekti
või teha näidisaktis muudatusi ja täiendusi vastavalt vajadusele)/.
5.9. Kui lepingut rahastatakse välisvahenditest, kohustub täitja tellija juhendamisel märgistama asjad
enne nende üleandmist vastavalt õigusaktides kehtestatud nõuetele.
5.10. Tellija kontrollib asjade vastavust lepingutingimustele ning allkirjastab vastuvõtuakti hiljemalt
10 tööpäeva jooksul arvates toote üleandmisest.
5.11. Mistahes asjade ja teenuste osa valmimisel/tarnimisel võib tellija anda välja vastuvõtuakti vastava
osa kohta. Selline vastuvõtmine ei mõjuta tellija kohustust täita kõiki lepingus ettenähtud
kohustusi.
5.12. Pooled peavad informeerima teist poolt viivitusest või viivituse sattumise ohust ja põhjustest
esimesel võimalusel.
6. Ümbertöötlemine
6.1. Täitja peab lepingu kehtivuse ajal ostetavate asjade tarnimisel või hiljem võtma tellijalt
ümbertöötlemiseks vastu lepingus märgitud ostetavate asjade kogusega võrdse koguse asju.
Pakendamine on täitja kulul. Täitja peab tagama ümbertöötlemiseks võetava printeri osas kulleri,
kes võtab printeri utiliseerimiseks samal ajal tellitud printeri tarnega või hiljemalt 2 nädalat pärast
tellitud printeri tarnet.
6.2. Täitja peab täishooldusteenuse paketi kehtivuse ajal toonerite tarnimisel võtma tellijalt
ümbertöötlemiseks vastu tarnitud toonerite kogusega võrdse koguse kasutatud toonereid.
Pakendamine on täitja kulul.
6.3. Täitja peab võtma punktis 6.1 ja 6.2 nimetatud asjad vastu tellija asukohas.
5 / 11
6.4. Täitja peab tagama vastu võetud printerite ja toonerite ümbertöötlemise vastavalt valdkonnas
kehtivale asjakohasele seadusandlusele ja heale tavale. Tellijal on põhjendatud kahtluse korral
õigus nõuda täitjalt vastavate tõendite esitamist.
6.5. Täitja peab tellija soovil utiliseerima printerite tarnimisel, laiali vedamisel või hilisemal
paigaldamisel tekkinud pakkematerjali ja tarkvara andmekandjad.
7 Asja kvaliteet ja vastavus lepingu tingimustele
7.1 Üleantava asja kvaliteet peab vastama kokkulepitud tingimustele ning tootja poolt antud
kirjelduses nimetatud tehnilistele ja kvaliteeditingimustele.
7.2 Asja vastavus punktis 7.1. kehtestatud tingimustele tõestatakse kvaliteedisertifikaadiga või mõne
teise dokumendiga (sh litsentsikoodi), mis antakse üle täitjale koos tootega.
7.3 Lepingus käsitlevad pooled mõisteid "asja mittekvaliteetsus" ja "asja mittevastavus lepingule"
järgmises tähenduses:
7.3.1 asja mittekvaliteetsus – asi ei vasta kvaliteedisertifikaadile, tootja poolt kirjeldatud
omadustele või mõnele muule poolte vahel kokku lepitud asja kvaliteeti tõendavale
dokumendile.
7.3.2 asja mittevastavus lepingule – asi on kõlbmatu otstarbeks, milleks säärase kirjeldusega
asja harilikult kasutatakse või asi on kõlbmatu selleks eesmärgiks, millest teisele poolele
teatati või asi pole esitatud/toodetud sellisel viisil, nagu poolte vahel kokku lepiti või
nagu on sellist asja harilikult esitatud/toodetud või asi ei ole see asi, mille üleandmises
pooled kokku leppisid.
7.4 Juhul, kui tellija avastab asja mittevastavuse lepingule või mittekvaliteetsuse, teatab ta sellest
koheselt täitjale. Teatamine peab toimuma vastavalt punktis 7.7 toodud tähtajale.
7.5 Tellija koostab kahepoolse akti asja puuduste kohta ja kutsub akti koostamisele ka täitja esindaja.
Tellija võib jätta täitja akti koostamisele kutsumata, kui nt puudus on kergesti tuvastatav ja täitja
aktsepteerib puudust ilma kohale tulemata.
7.6 Juhul, kui täitja oma esindajat määratud tähtajaks kohale ei saada või väljakutsele ei reageeri,
võib tellija omal valikul:
7.6.1 koostada ühepoolse akti, mis on pretensiooni esitamise aluseks;
7.6.2 kasutada erapooletut eksperti. Sellisel juhul nõutakse ekspertiisikulud sisse täitjalt.
7.7 Mittekvaliteetse või lepingu tingimustele mittevastava asja üleandmisel on täitja kohustatud tellija
nõudmisel kas:
7.7.1 mittekvaliteetse või lepingu tingimustele mittevastava asja ümber vahetama omal kulul
vastava kvaliteediga või lepingu tingimustele vastava asja vastu tellija määratud
mõistliku tähtaja jooksul;
7.7.2 asja kvaliteedi tasuta parandama või tellijale parandamise kulud hüvitama tellija
määratud tähtaja jooksul;
7.7.3 vastavalt asja maksumust/kasutusrenditasu alandama.
7.8 Täitja poolt ettenähtud kohustuste täitmisega viivitamisel rakendatakse lepingu punkti 12 sätteid.
7.9 Tellijal on õigus lisaks punktis 7.7 toodule asja mittekvaliteetsuse või lepingu tingimustele
mittevastavuse ilmnemisel nõuda leppetrahvi kuni 30 (kolmkümmend) % lepingu hinnast ning
selle tagajärjel tekitatud kahju, sh välisrahastuse alusel rahastatud projekti toetuse tagasimakse
hüvitamist, osas, mida leppetrahv ei kata.
7.10 Tellija poolt punktis 7.7 - 7.9 ettenähtud nõuete esitamine ei võta temalt õigust leping ühepoolselt
ennetähtaegselt lõpetada.
6 / 11
8 Täishooldusteenuse ja asjade monitooringu tingimused
8.1. Nõuded, mis on vajalikud täishooldusteenuse osutamiseks ja asjade monitooringuks on välja
toodud raamlepingu lisa 1 tehnilise kirjelduse punktides 5 ja 6. Monitoorimissüsteemi kaudu
isikuandmeid ei töödelda.
9 Kasutusrent ja asjade tagastamine
9.1 Kasutusrendi periood algab asjade vastuvõtuakti allkirjastamisele järgnevast kalendrikuust (nt kui
seadme vastuvõtmine toimub 13.oktoobril, algab rendiperiood 1. novembrist) ja kestab 48 kuud.
Kasutusrent hõlmab kõiki asju ja tarkvara koos litsentsidega.
9.2 Rendimakseid tasutakse võrdsetes osades, üks kord kvartalis rendiperioodi eest.
9.3 Rendiperioodi lõppedes hankijale asjade omandamise kohustust ei teki ja kõik asjad tagastatakse
rendiandjale lepingus ette nähtud perioodi jooksul. Asjade tagastamine (üleandmine ja
vastuvõtmine) toimub tellija poolt määratud asukohas Eestis, selle eest eraldi tasu maksmata
9.4 Täitja on kohustatud hiljemalt 90 kalendripäeva enne renditud asjade lepingu lõpptähtaega saatma
tellijale teavituse lepingu peatse lõppemise kohta, milles on välja toodud hankelepingu nr ja
hankelepingu lõpptähtaeg.
9.5 Iga asi (v.a lepingus sätestatud mittetagastatavad andmekandjad) tagastatakse rendiperioodi
lõppemisel 60 kalendripäeva jooksul või pooltevahelisel kokkuleppel muul ajal
(tagastamisperiood) vastavasisulise üleandmise ja vastuvõtu akti allkirjastamise teel poolte vahel.
Täitja on kohustatud asjad vastu võtma, hiljemalt 10 tööpäeva jooksul arvates asjade
üleandmisest.
9.6 Tellija peab võimaldama täitjal teostada tagastamisperioodil asjade tagastamisega seotud
toiminguid. Asjade kasutamine tellija poolt pärast rendiperioodi lõppu, st tagastamisperioodil, ei
ole lubatud, v. a vastava kokkuleppe olemasolul täitjaga.
9.7 Täitjal on õigus nõuda tellijalt asja (nii printeri kui ka selle juurde kuuluv lisaseade ja komponent)
tähtaegse tagastamata jätmise korral (viivitus) kasutusrendimakse tasumist proportsionaalselt
viivituses olnud kalendripäevadega, kuid igakuiselt mitte rohkem kui ühe kuu kasutusrendimakse
hind ja kogumina mitte rohkem kui asja jääkväärtus.
9.8 Tellijal on õigus mitte tagastada ja taaskasutada asjade pakendamiseks kasutatud pakkematerjali
ja tarkvara andmekandjaid.
10 Teated ja kirjavahetus
10.1 Tellija ja täitja vaheline kirjavahetus toimub elektroonilisel või posti teel ning selleks otstarbeks
määratud poolte kontaktandmetel ja aadressidel.
10.2 Pooltevahelised lepinguga seotud teated peavad olema vähemalt kirjalikku taasesitamist
võimaldavas vormis, välja arvatud juhtudel, kui teated on informatsioonilise iseloomuga, mille
edastamisel teisele poolele ei ole õiguslikke tagajärgi. Teade loetakse kättesaaduks, kui:
10.2.1 teade on üle antud allkirja vastu;
10.2.2 teade on edastatud tähitud kirjana poole postiaadressil ja teate postitamisest on
möödunud 5 (viis) kalendripäeva;
10.2.3 e-kirja saatmisest on möödunud ööpäev.
11 Lepingu muutmine ja täiendamine
11.1 Lepingut võib muuta poolte kirjalikul kokkuleppel. Muudatused jõustuvad pärast nende
allkirjastamist mõlema poole poolt või poolte poolt määratud tähtajal. Kirjaliku vormi
mittejärgimisel on muudatused tühised.
11.2 Riigihangete seaduse § 123 lg 1 p 1 kirjeldatud muudatused lepitakse kokku tellija ja täitja
esindajate poolt kirjalikku taasesitamist võimaldavas vormis.
7 / 11
12 Poolte vastutus lepingu rikkumisel
12.1 Pooled vastutavad lepinguga võetud kohustuste täitmata jätmise või mittekohase täitmise eest
Eesti Vabariigi õigusaktides ning lepingus ettenähtud korras.
12.2 Juhul, kui täitja viivitab oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisega üle kokkulepitud tähtaja, on
tellijal õigus nõuda leppetrahvi tasumist, mille suuruseks on 0,15 (null koma viisteist) % lepingu
hinnast iga viivitatud kalendripäeva eest, kuid kokku mitte rohkem kui 30% lepingu hinnast.
12.3 Juhul, kui täitja ületab lisa 1 tehnilise kirjelduse punktis 6 ja või üldtingimuste punktis 17 toodud
reageerimisaegu on tellijal õigus nõuda leppetrahvi iga ületatud tunni eest 50 eurot, kuid kokku
mitte rohkem kui 30% lepingu hinnast. Tellijal on õigus käesolevas punktis nimetatud leppetrahv
kinni pidada täitjale tasumisele kuuluvatest summadest.
12.4 Oluliseks lepingurikkumiseks loetakse muuhulgas, kuid mitte ainult, järgmised juhud:
12.4.1 täitja hilineb oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisega rohkem kui 30 kalendripäeva;
12.4.2 täitja ei kõrvalda puudusi või viivitab nende kõrvaldamisega rohkem kui 30
kalendripäeva;
12.4.3 täitja on korduvalt eksinud lepingus toodud üleandmisakti ja/või e-arve koostamise
nõuete vastu.
12.4.4 täitja suhtes on tehtud pankrotiotsus või kui täitja on sattunud tõsistesse
majandusraskustesse;
12.4.5 täitja ei saa lepingu täitmiseks vajalikku luba või litsentsi;
12.4.6 täitja ei täida garantiiperioodil lepingust tulenevaid kohustusi;
12.4.7 täitja annab oma lepingujärgsed kohustused üle kolmandatele isikutele;
12.4.8 pool on rikkunud konfidentsiaalsusnõuet;
12.4.9 pool on rikkunud avalikustamise keelu kohustust;
12.4.10 tellija on viivituses lepingus kokku lepitud maksetähtajaga rohkem kui 30
kalendripäeva.
12.5 Poolel on õigus nõuda lepingu olulise rikkumise korral leppetrahvi kuni 30% lepingu hinnast iga
vastava juhtumi korral. Tellijal on õigus käesolevas punktis nimetatud leppetrahv kinni pidada
täitjale tasumisele kuuluvatest summadest. Leppetrahvi nõude esitamine ei võta poolelt õigust
nõuda tekitatud kahju, sh välisrahastuse alusel rahastatud projekti toetuse tagasimakse hüvitamist
või kasutada muid seadusest tulenevaid õiguskaitsevahendeid.
12.6 Poolte rahaline koguvastutus on piiratud lepingu hinnaga, v. a juhul, kui pool rikkus kohustust
tahtlikult või raske hooletuse tõttu.
13 Lepingujärgsete kohustuste peatumine
13.1 Tellija võib peatada täitjale lepingujärgselt makstavate summade maksmise kas osaliselt või
täielikult, kui:
13.1.1 täitja ei täida lepingut;
13.1.2 vastuvõtmise, testimise või auditeerimise käigus avastatakse puudusi või muid
täitjapoolseid kohustuste rikkumisi;
13.1.3 tellija lepingujärgsete kohustuste õigeaegset ja korrektset täitmist segab muu asjaolu,
mille eest vastutab täitja.
13.2 Täitja võib peatada tellijale lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmise kas osaliselt või täielikult, kui:
13.2.1 tellija ei täida lepingut;
13.2.2 täitja lepingujärgsete kohustuste õigeaegset ja korrektset täitmist segab muu asjaolu,
mille eest vastutab tellija.
8 / 11
14 Testid
14.1 Kui pooled on kirjalikult kokku leppinud, viiakse pärast asjade tarnimist, kokkupanekut ja/või
installeerimist asjade nõuetele vastavuse kindlakstegemiseks läbi testid.
14.2 Kui lepingus ei ole teste ette nähtud, võib tellija viia läbi testid, mida ta peab vajalikuks selleks,
et kontrollida asjade vastavust neile esitatud nõuetele.
14.3 Täitja esitab tellijale kõik tema poolt läbiviidud testide tulemusena valminud dokumentide
koopiad.
14.4 Kui asi või mistahes selle osa ei läbi teste, viiakse otsekohe pärast seda, kui täitja on teinud
vajalikud korrektuurid testide edukaks läbiviimiseks, läbi kordustestid samadel tingimustel.
14.5 Kordustestide eest täitjale täiendavat tasu ei maksta.
15 Dokumentatsioon
15.1 Täitja varustab tellijat piisava ja adekvaatse dokumentatsiooniga, kaasa arvatud informatsioon
asja projekteerimise ja funktsioneerimise kohta, mis on vajalik, et tellija saaks asju ja teenuseid
efektiivselt kasutada, hooldada, kohandada ja neile lisaseadmeid lisada.
15.2 Dokumentide valmistamiseks ja levitamiseks kasutatakse paberkandjat või elektroonilist
infokandjat.
16 Koolitus
16.1 Kui pooled on lepingu eritingimustes kirjalikult kokku leppinud, tagab täitja tellija personalile
adekvaatse väljaõppe, kindlustamaks asjade ja teenuste rahuldava ja efektiivse toimimise.
16.2 Koolituse toimumise täpne aeg, koht ja maht kooskõlastatakse eelnevalt tellija kontaktisikuga.
17 Garantii
17.1 Asjadel, v.a tarkvara, selle litsentsil või muudele õigustel peab olema tootjagarantii. Lisaks
printeritele lähevad garantii alla ka kõik lisaseadmed ja –komponendid.
17.2 Samasuguste asjade garantiitingimused on ühesugused kogu garantii piirkonna ulatuses. Garantii
piirkonnaks on Eesti või Euroopa Liit.
17.3 Garantiiga seotud või hõlmatud töid (garantiitöid) teostatakse samadel tingimustel kogu garantii
piirkonnas, välja arvatud Euroopa Liit, vaata erisus punktis 17.11.
17.4 Garantii, garantiitööde või nende käigus asendatavate asjade või osutatavate teenuste eest eraldi
või täiendavalt tasu ei maksta.
17.5 Täitja peab ostu puhul andma kõikidele asjadele 2 aastase on-site tootja garantii ning tasuta
tarkvarauuendused 2 aasta jooksul. Kui tellija valib e-kataloogis lisateenuste hulgast asjade juurde
tootja garantii 3 aastaks, pakub täitja kõikidele asjadele 3 aastase on-site tootja garantii ning tasuta
tarkvarauuendused 3 aasta jooksul. Garantiiperiood hakkab kulgema alates asja vastuvõtmisest
tellija poolt (vastuvõtuakti allkirjastamisest).
17.6 Rendi puhul on on-site tootja garantiiperioodi kestus 48 (nelikümmend kaheksa) kuud.
Garantiiperiood hakkab kulgema alates asja vastuvõtmisest tellija poolt (vastuvõtuakti
allkirjastamisest).
17.7 Täishooldusteenuse puhul, sh kui see on rakendatud ostetud asjadele, tagab täitja 48 kuulise on-site
tootja garantii ning tasuta tarkvarauuendused 48 kuu jooksul.
17.8 Garantii peab olema antud tootja poolt ehk täitja peab andma asjadele tootja garantii. Lepingu
raames tähendab tootja garantii tootja poolset tellimusega soetatud asjade garantiitööde teostamist
kõikide tootja partnerite (tootja esinduste, müüjate) juures olenemata asjaolust, et partner ei
pruugi olla antud hankes täitja/pakkuja. Tootja garantiid saab esitada ainult tootja. Tootjana
käsitatakse lepingu mõistes juriidilist isikut, kes valmistab pakkumuses esitatud asju (sh ka isikut,
kes komplekteerib asja teise tootja asja/teiste tootjate asjade komponentidest ja omab õigust
9 / 11
turustada valminud asja enda kaubamärgi all). Tootja kinnituse andmise õigust omavateks
isikuteks on lisaks tootjale ka tootja tütarettevõtjad ja filiaalid.
17.9 Täitja tagab asjadele tootjapoolse garantii olemasolu hankelepingu üldtingimuste punktis 17
nimetatud ulatuses ning tellijal peab olema võimalik garantiiperioodi kestust kontrollida tootja
veebilehelt või esitatakse tootja kinnitus garantiiperioodi kestuse kohta vastava järelpäringu
korral (tellija ei ole kohustatud kinnitust küsima pakkuja kaudu).
17.10 Garantii on on-site garantii (garantiitöid teostatakse asja asukohas või tellija poolt määratud
asukohas garantii piirkonnas) hiliseima tõrketeatele reageerimise ajaga 3 (kolm) tundi tööajal
(tööpäevadel kell 8:00-17:00). Garantiitööde teostamise asukohta võib muuta ainult tellija
nõusolekul (nt kui tekib vajadus asi tellija valdusest välja viia).
17.11 Väljaspool Eestit (Euroopa Liit) garantii piirkonnas kohustub pakkuja tagama tootjagarantii kas
tootja ametliku esinduse kaudu või muul moel hiliseima tõrketeatele reageerimise ajaga 3 (kolm)
tundi tööajal (tööpäevadel kell 8:00-17:00). Tõrkega asja täieliku töövõime taastamise või
samasuguse tõrkevaba asjaga asendamise tähtaeg on 3 tööpäeva alates sellekohase teate
saamisest. Asendamine ei tohi kaasa tuua hankijale lisakulusid.
17.12 Kui asja komponentides esineb garantiiperioodil tõrkeid rohkem kui kolm korda, asendatakse asi
tervikuna teise samasuguse tõrkevaba asjaga.
17.13 Tõrkega asja täieliku töövõime taastamise või samasuguse tõrkevaba asjaga asendamise tähtaeg
on kuni 1 (üks) tööpäev alates sellekohase teate saamisest, kui pooled ei ole konkreetse asja
suhtes teisiti kokku leppinud.
17.14 Tellijal on õigus nõuda asja vastuvõtmisest 3 kuu jooksul kõigi lepingus märgitud asjade korraga
ümbervahetamist 30 kalendripäeva jooksul kui:
17.14.1 Vähemalt 60% (koguseliselt) tellimuses, pakkumuse esitamise ettepanekus märgitud
printeritest kokku esineb täpselt sama tüüpi tõrge;
17.14.2 Vähemalt 60% (koguseliselt) tellimuses või pakkumuse esitamise ettepanekus märgitud
printerite ühetüübilises lisaseadmes kokku esineb sama tüüpi tõrge.
17.15 Punktis 17.14 nimetatud kõikide asjade ümbervahetamise tarneaeg ei tohi olla pikem kui uue
seadme tellimisel va olukorras kus pooled on selle eraldi pikemana kokku leppinud.
17.16 Täitja võib volitada garantiitöid (hõlmab ainult garantiiga seotud või hõlmatud töid, mitte
tootjagarantiid) teostama kolmandaid isikuid. Vastavate isikute andmed märgitakse hankelepingu
eritingimustesse.
17.17 Hankija kasutab seadmed heaperemehelikult ning kasutab garantiiperioodil ainult
originaalkulutarvikuid. Hankijast tingitud seadme füüsilised vigastused ei lähe garantii alla.
18 Uued versioonid ja redaktsioonid
18.1 Uute versioonide ja redaktsioonide kasutusele võtmise tingimused on kirjeldatud lepingu lisades.
19 Load ja litsentsid
19.1 Täitja vastutab ainuisikuliselt lepingu täitmiseks vajalike lubade ja litsentside saamise eest.
Tellija teeb täitjaga mõistliku koostööd, hoidmaks ära selliste lubade või litsentside väljaandmise
asjatut viivitamist või väljaandmisest keeldumist.
19.2 Tellija võib ilma ette teatamata lepingu lõpetada, kui täitja ei saa lepingu täitmiseks vajalikku
luba või litsentsi.
19.3 Täitja garanteerib, et tal on õigus anda tellijale lepingu objektiks oleva tarkvara ja teiste autori- või
muude sarnaste õigustega kaitstavate esemete kasutamisõigus.
19.4 Täitja garanteerib, et tellijale asja kasutamiseks antava litsentsi üleandmisega ei rikuta
10 / 11
kolmandate isikute õigusi. Juhul kui kolmas isik esitab oma õiguste rikkumise tõttu tellija vastu
hagi ning see rahuldatakse, tasub täitja võimalikud kahjuhüvitusnõuded, samuti advokaaditasud
ja muud kohtumenetlusega seonduvad kulud.
20 Riski üleminek
20.1 Juhusliku hävimise või kahjustumise risk läheb tellijale üle lepingu objektiks oleva asja
üleandmisel, samuti hetkel, mil tellija satub viivitusse toimingu tegemisega, millega ta asja
üleandmisele peab kaasa aitama.
21 Kolmandad isikud
21.1 Täitja ei või oma lepingujärgseid kohustusi anda üle kolmandale isikule.
21.2 Täitja vastutab kõigi isikute eest, keda ta kasutab oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisel.
22 Konfidentsiaalsus
22.1 Pooled peavad lepingu täitmise käigust teineteiselt ükskõik mis vormis saadud kogu
informatsiooni, millele seda avaldanud lepingupool on osutanud kui konfidentsiaalsele või mille
konfidentsiaalsust võib mõistlikult eeldada, konfidentsiaalseks (sh isikuandmed, know-how) ja ei
anna seda edasi kolmandatele isikutele ilma teise poole kirjaliku nõusolekuta. Lepingus sätestatud
konfidentsiaalsuse nõue ei laiene informatsiooni avaldamisele poolte audiitoritele ja
advokaatidele ning juhtudel, kui pool on õigusaktidest tulenevalt kohustatud informatsiooni
avaldama.
22.2 Täitja kasutab lepingu täitmise käigus saadud konfidentsiaalset informatsiooni üksnes lepingus
sätestatud eesmärkide täitmiseks. Täitja kohustub lepingu lõppemisel kustutama kõik talle
lepingu täitmisel teatavaks saanud konfidentsiaalse info, isikuandmed ja nimetatute koopiad, v.a
juhul, kui õigusaktidest tuleneb teisiti.
22.3 Pooled täidavad kõiki lepingu täitmise kohas kehtivaid isikuandmete töötlemisalaseid nõudeid,
andmete turvalisust puudutavaid ning isikuandmete kaitse alaseid Euroopa Liidu ja Eesti
Vabariigi õigusakte ja muid eeskirju.
22.4 Täitja kohustub võtma organisatsioonilisi, füüsilisi ja infotehnilisi turvameetmeid
konfidentsiaalsete andmete kaitseks juhusliku või tahtliku volitamata muutmise, juhusliku
hävimise, tahtliku hävitamise, avalikustamise jms eest.
22.5 Täitja kohustub mitte kasutama konfidentsiaalset teavet mitte ühelgi viisil isikliku kasu saamise
eesmärgil ega kolmandate isikute huvides.
22.6 Pooled on kohustatud hoidma saladuses teise poole poolt kasutatavaid töömeetodeid, töös
kasutatud protsesse, süsteeme jmt, millised neid kasutav pool on ise välja töötanud.
22.7 Pooled võivad teise poole kirjalikul nõusolekul võimaldada juurdepääsu konfidentsiaalsele
informatsioonile üksnes nendele töötajatele, kellel on selleks oma tööülesannete täitmiseks
vajadus ning tagavad, et need töötajad on teadlikud ja täidavad isikuandmete töötlemisalaseid
nõudeid ning õigusakte.
22.8 Konfidentsiaalsusnõue kehtib nii lepingu täitmise ajal kui ka pärast seda tähtajatult.
22.9 Kõik eelnimetatud kohustused kehtestab täitja kõikidele kolmandatele isikutele, keda ta kasutab
oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisel.
22.10 Tulenevalt konfidentsiaalse informatsiooni laadist on tellijal õigus seada täiendavaid nõuded
ja/või juhised isikuandmete töötlemiseks.
11 / 11
23 Avalikud suhted
23.1 Pooled ei tegele seoses lepinguga avalike suhetega ega anna teateid pressile, elektroonilisele
meediale, üldsusele või teistele auditooriumidele, välja arvatud teise poole eelneval kirjalikul
nõusolekul. Avaldada võib vaid teateid, mis on teise poolega eelnevalt kooskõlastatud.
23.2 Kõik eelnimetatud kohustused kehtestab täitja ka kõigile kolmandatele isikutele, keda ta kasutab
oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisel.
24 Lepingu kehtivus
24.1 Leping jõustub selle sõlmimise hetkest ja kehtib kuni lepinguliste kohustuste täitmiseni mõlema
poole poolt, kui lepingus ei ole määratletud teisiti.
24.2 Lepingut võib lõpetada ennetähtaegselt poolte kokkuleppel. Üks pool võib lõpetada lepingu
ühepoolselt ennetähtaegselt seaduses ja lepingus ettenähtud juhtudel.
25 Vääramatu jõud
25.1 Lepingust tulenevate kohustuste mittetäitmist või mittenõuetekohast täitmist ei loeta Lepingu
rikkumiseks, kui selle põhjuseks oli vääramatu jõud. Vääramatu jõuna käsitlevad pooled
võlaõigusseaduse §-s 103 lg 2 nimetatud asjaolusid.
25.2 Pool, kelle tegevus lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmisel on takistatud vääramatu jõu asjaolude
tõttu, on kohustatud sellest viivitamatult kirjalikult teatama teisele Poolele, esitades teavitusega
ühes tõendid kõigi järgnevate asjaolude esinemise kohta:
25.2.1 takistava asjaolu esinemine, mis takistab kohustuse kohast täitmist;
25.2.2 takistava asjaolu asetsemine väljaspool võlgniku mõjusfääri;
25.2.3 asjaolu ettenägematus;
25.2.4 asjaolu vältimatus ja ületamatus.
25.3 Vääramatu jõu asjaolude ilmnemisel pikeneb Lepingu lõpptähtaeg nimetatud asjaolude esinemise
perioodi võrra. Pool peab vääramatu jõu asjaolude äralangemisel Lepingut täitma asuma. Kui
vääramatu jõu asjaolude tõttu on Poole Lepingust tulenevate kohustuste täitmine takistatud enam
kui 60ne kalendripäeva võrra võib teine Pool öelda lepingu üles.
26 Kehtiv seadusandlus
26.1 Lepingule ning kõikidele lepingu osaks olevatele dokumentidele kohaldatakse Eesti Vabariigi
õigusakte.
27 Vaidluste lahendamine
27.1 Lepinguga seotud või sellest tulenevate arusaamatuste või vaidluste puhul ja eeldusel, et mõlemad
pooled on sellest kirjalikult teatanud, püüavad pooled leida lahenduse läbirääkimiste teel.
27.2 Läbirääkimiste tulemusel kokkuleppe mittesaavutamisel lahendatakse vaidlused Harju
Maakohtus.
Lisa 3
HANKELEPINGU ERITINGIMUSED
Tallinnas
…………., registrikoodiga …………, asukohaga ……….., ……….., mida põhimääruse alusel esindab
……….. (edaspidi nimetatud tellija)
ja
………….., registrikoodiga ………….., asukohaga ……………, mida põhikirja alusel esindab juhatuse
liige …………….. (edaspidi nimetatud täitja),
keda nimetatakse edaspidi pool või koos pooled, sõlmisid käesoleva hankelepingu (edaspidi leping)
alljärgnevas:
1. Lepingu alus ja ese
1.1. Leping sõlmitakse riigihanke „Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)“
(viitenumber 261480) tulemusel sõlmitud raamlepingu nr …. alusel.
1.2. Lepingule kehtivad kõik raamlepingus ja nimetatu lisades toodud tingimused, kui lepingus ei ole
sätestatud teisiti.
1.3. Lepingu alusel müüb täitja tellijale ……….. /märkida vastav lepingu lisa/ kirjeldatud asjad ……
/kui on tellitud täishooldusteenus, siis märkida „koos täishooldusteenusega“/ ning täidab kõik
muud lepingust tulenevad kohustused.
/või/
Täitja annab tellijale kasutusrendile koos täishooldusteenusega…….. /märkida rendiperiood/
kuuks …….. /märkida vastav lepingu lisa/ kirjeldatud asjad ning täidab kõik muud lepingust
tulenevad kohustused.
2. Lepingu dokumendid
2.1. Lepingu lahutamatuteks osadeks on raamleping ja nimetatu lisad, üleandmise - ja vastuvõtmise
aktid, pooltevahelised kirjalikud teated ning kõik lepingu muudatused ja muud lisad.
2.2. Lepingu lisadeks lepingu allkirjastamisel on:
2.2.1 Lisa nr 1 e-kataloogi ostutellimus nr …. /vastavalt tellija valikule võib lisada lisana kaasa
ka tellitud asjade info/
2.1.2. Lisa nr … /vastavalt tellija valikule võidakse lisadena märkida maksegraafik või muud
lisad/ Soovi korral lisa ridu.
2.2. Vastavalt tellija valikule võidakse kasutada etteantud asja üleandmise-vastuvõtmise akti (näidis
alla laetav riigihangete registrist link: https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-
web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info Hanke alusandmed - Dokumendid -Lisa 9 Akt) (tellijal
on õigus kasutada oma akti projekti või teha näidisaktis muudatusi ja täiendusi vastavalt
vajadusele)/
3. Lepingu hind ja tasumine
3.1. Lepingu hind on ……… /märkida kas asjade soetusmaksumus või kasutusrendi puhul
rendimaksete kogusumma koos lisateenustega/ eurot, „millele lisandub täishooldusteenuse
maksumus“ /jutumärkides lauseosa jätta sisse kui asjad on rendile võetud või asja ostmisega on
tellitud täishooldusteenus, muul juhul kustutada/. Lepingu hind sisaldab lepingu täitmiseks
vajalikke tasusid ja makse. Lepingu hinnale lisandub käibemaks.
2 / 3
3.2. Tellija tasub täitjale hankelepingu üldtingimustes sätestatud korras.
3.3. Maksetähtaeg: /märkida juhul, kui erineb hankelepingu üldtingimustes toodust/
3.4. Kasutusrendimakseid hakatakse arvestama asjade vastuvõtuakti allkirjastamisele
järgnevast kalendrikuust. /märkida kasutusrendi puhul, asjade ostu puhul kustutada/
3.5. Lepingu finantseerimise allikas: /märkida vajadusel/
4. Lepingu täitmine
4.1. Asjade tarneaeg: …….. Garantiiperioodi kestus: ……..
4.2. /Vajadusel märkida kolmandad isikud, kellele täitja on volitanud täishooldusteenuse
raames teostatavate hooldustööde teostamise/
4.3. /Vajadusel märkida kolmandad isikud, kellele täitja on volitanud garantiitööde
teostamise/
4.4. /Tellijal on õigus märkida täiendavalt vajalikke andmeid, nt tarnekoht, paigaldamine,
koolitusega seonduv, kui see on tellitud, toodete ekspordiga seonduv, samaaegselt
üleantavate toodete nimekiri jne/
5. Muud tingimused
5.1. Leping jõustub allkirjastamise hetkest ja kehtib kuni lepingujärgsete kohustuste täitmiseni.
5.2. Pooled tagavad ja avaldavad, et lepingu sõlmimisega ei ole nad rikkunud ühtegi enda suhetes
kehtiva seaduse, põhikirja või muu normatiivakti sätet ega ühtki endale varem sõlmitud lepingute
ja kokkulepetega võetud kohustust.
5.3. Pooled kinnitavad ja tõendavad, et:
5.3.2. neil on seaduses ettenähtud piisav õigus- ja teovõime lepingu sõlmimiseks ning lepingust
tulenevate kohustuste täitmiseks ja õiguste realiseerimiseks;
5.3.3. nende poolt lepingule ja selle lisadele allakirjutanud isikutele on antud piisavad volitused
selle lepingu sõlmimiseks kooskõlas õigusaktide ja muude normatiivaktidega.
5.4. Lepingu sõlmimisega kaotavad kehtivuse kõik pooltevahelised varasemad kokkulepped niivõrd,
kuivõrd need on vastuolus lepinguga.
5.5. Lepingu allakirjutamisega tõendavad pooled, et on tutvunud ja on nõus lepingu ja selle lisadega
ning oluliste osadega ning mõistavad täielikult enesele võetavate kohustuste sisu ning nende
tagajärgi.
6. Poolte kontaktandmed
6.1. Tellija kontaktandmed on:
6.1.2. Tellija esindaja tööde vastuvõtmise aktide, teadete jms lepinguga seonduvate
dokumentide allkirjastamisel on …….. ……….. (tel: ……….., elektronpost:
…………..).
6.1.3. Tellija kontaktisik tööde teostamise juhendamisel ning müüjale vajaliku
lähteinformatsiooni ja tööülesannete täpsustamisel jmt. on ……………… (tel:
………….., elektronpost:……………).
6.2. Täitja kontaktandmed on:
6.2.2. Täitja esindajaks tööde üleandmise aktide, teadete jms lepinguga seonduvate
dokumentide allkirjastamisel on …………………. (tel: …….., elektronpost: ……….).
3 / 3
6.2.3. Täitja kontaktisik tööde teostamisel ning tellijale vajaliku informatsiooni ja tööülesannete
täpsustamisel jmt. on ………….. (tel: …….., elektronpost:…………….).
Tellija: Täitja:
(allkirjastatud digitaalselt) (allkirjastatud digitaalselt)
1 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
HANKEPASS
Hankepass ehk Euroopa ühtne hankedokument (ESPD) on ettevõtja enda kinnitus, mis on esialgne tõend ametiasutuste või kolmandate isikute poolt väljastatavate tõendite asemel.
Pakkumus:438327
Ettevõtja: ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing
Roll: peapakkuja
I OSA: HANKE JA HANKIJAGA SEOTUD TEAVE
Teave avaldamise kohta Teate number ELTs:
-
ELT URL:
Riigi ametlik teataja:
261480
Kui Euroopa Liidu Teatajas hankekuulutust avaldatud ei ole või kui selle avaldamist ei nõuta, peab avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija ise teabe esitama, et hankemenetlust saaks üheselt identifitseerida (nt viide siseriikliku avaldamise kohta).
Hankija andmed Ametlik nimi:
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613)
Riik:
Eesti
Hankija aadress:
Lõõtsa tn 8a
Hankija veebiaadress:
https://www.rit.ee
E-posti aadress:
2 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Teave hankemenetluse kohta Hanke menetlusliik:
Avatud hankemenetlus
Pealkiri:
Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)
Lühikirjeldus:
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (RIT) hangib Vabariigi Valitsuse 14.04.2022 korralduse nr 119 alusel printereid. Hanke alusel sõlmitud raamleping laieneb kõigile riigiasutustele, kes on vastavas korralduses nimetatud, lisaks juriidilistele isikutele, kes on volitanud RIT-i hanget korraldama (ühishankijad, kes on toodud ühishankijate nimekirjas) ja vabatahtliku keskse hankimise kaudu soetajatele. Hankelepinguid sõlmitakse nii asjade väljaostmiseks (asja omandamise õigusega) kui ka rentimiseks (asja omandamise õiguseta) täishooldusteenuse võimalusega. Hankelepingu esemeks on printerid koos lisaseadmete ja -komponentidega. Hanke eseme hulka kuulub ka ostetava või renditava asja kohaletoomine hankija määratud kohta Eestis ning hankelepingu lõppemisel renditava asja tagastamine (tagasivõtmine) hankija poolt määratud asukohas Eestis.
Avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija poolt toimikule antud viitenumber (kui on asjakohane):
261480
Hanke liik:
Asjad
Hanke CPV-d: 30232100-5 Printerid ja plotterid
Hanke osad Hanke osade kohta kehtivad järgnevad nõuded: Tingimuse kirjeldus: Pakkumusi võib esitada: Kõigile osadele Maksimaalne osade arv, mille kohta võib pakkumusi esitada: Maksimaalne osade arv, mille kohta võidakse sõlmida leping ühe pakkujaga:
3 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
II OSA: ETTEVÕTJAGA SEOTUD TEAVE
A: Teave ettevõtja kohta
Nimi: ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing
Registrikood: 10672508
Riik: EST
Aadress: Laki tn 30 Tallinn 12915
Üldine veebileht:
Kontaktisikud: RENÉ RANDRÜÜT
Kontaktide e-posti aadressid: [email protected]
Kontaktide telefoninumbrid: +372 5065988
Ettevõtte suurus: Mikroettevõte
Töötajate arv:
Käive:
Valuuta:
Finantsalase võimekuse kirjeldus:
Tehnilise võimekuse kirjeldus:
Teostatud tööde kirjeldus:
Ettevõtja tegevusvaldkond:
4 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
ETTEVÕTJA ON KAITSTUD TÖÖKOHT
Ainult reserveeritud hangete puhul: kas ettevõtja puhul on tegemist kaitstud töökohaga, sotsiaalse ettevõttega või ta täidab lepingut kaitstud tööhõive programmide raames?
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Mis on Teie vastus?
Vastus: Ei 4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Ei
ETTEVÕTJA ON KANTUD TUNNUSTATUD ETTEVÕTJATE AMETLIKKU NIMEKIRJA
Kui see on asjakohane, siis kas ettevõtja on kantud tunnustatud ettevõtjate ametlikku nimekirja või kas tal on olemas samaväärne tõend (nt riikliku (eel)kvalifitseerimissüsteemi alusel)?
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Mis on Teie vastus?
Vastus: Ei 5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Ei
HANKEMENETLUSES KOOS OSALEVAD ETTEVÕTJAD
Kas ettevõtja osaleb hankemenetluses koos teistega?
Küsimused ettevõtjale:
Ettevõtja nimi:ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing
Ettevõtja ID:10672508
Ettevõtja roll:peapakkuja
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? Vastus: Jah
5. URL Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
TEAVE TEISTE ÜKSUSTE SUUTLIKKUSELE TOETUMISE KOHTA
Kas ettevõtja toetub teiste üksuste suutlikkusele, et täita esitatud valikukriteeriumid ning eeskirjad (kui neid on)?
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Mis on Teie vastus?
Vastus: Ei 5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Jah 6. URL
Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
5 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
TEAVE NENDE ALLHANKIJATE KOHTA, KELLE NÄITAJATELE ETTEVÕTJA EI TUGINE
Kas ettevõtja kavatseb sõlmida lepingu mis tahes osa kohta allhanke kolmanda isikuga?
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Mis on Teie vastus?
Vastus: Ei 5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Jah 6. URL
Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
HANKE OSAD
Hanke osad, mille kohta ettevõtja soovib pakkumuse esitada
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Hanke osa number
Vastus: 4 2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Jah 3. URL
Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
ETTEVÕTJA KINNITUSED MAKSUDE TASUMISE KOHTA
Kas ettevõtja saab esitada tõendi sotsiaalkindlustusmaksete ja maksude tasumise kohta või esitada teabe, mis võimaldaks avaliku sektori hankijal või võrgustiku sektori hankijal saada sellise teabe otse ükskõik millise liikmesriigi tasuta andmebaasist?
Küsimused ettevõtjale: 1. Mis on Teie vastus?
Vastus: Jah 2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav?
Vastus: Jah 3. URL
Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
6 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
B: Teave ettevõtja esindajate kohta
Eesnimi: Rene
Perekonnanimi: Randrüüt
Sünniaeg:
Sünnikoht:
Aadress:
Linn/vald:
Postiindeks:
Riik: Eesti
E-post:
Telefon:
Vajaduse korral esitage üksikasjalik teave esindamise kohta (selle vormid, ulatus, eesmärk, ...):
III OSA: KÕRVALDAMISE ALUSED
A: Kõrvalejätmise alused seoses kriminaalasjas tehtud süüdimõistva otsusega
OSALEMINE KURITEGELIKUS ORGANISATSIOONIS
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud kuritegelikus organisatsioonis osalemise eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 1 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud kuritegelikus ühenduses osalemise eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
7 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
KORRUPTSIOON
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud korruptsiooni eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt? See kõrvalejätmise alus hõlmab ka korruptsiooni avaliku sektori hankija (võrgustiku sektori hankija) või ettevõtja riigi õiguses sätestatud määratluses.
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 1 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud aususe kohustuse rikkumise või korruptiivse teo eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
PETTUS
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud kelmuse eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 1 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud kelmuse eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
8 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
TERRORIAKTI TOIMEPANEK VÕI TERRORISTLIKU TEGEVUSEGA SEOTUD
ÕIGUSRIKKUMISED
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud terroriakti toimepaneku või terroristliku tegevusega seotud õigusrikkumiste eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 1 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud terroriakti toimepaneku või muu terroristliku tegevusega seotud kuriteo või sellele kihutamise, kaasaaitamise või selle katse eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
RAHAPESU VÕI TERRORISMI RAHASTAMINE
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud rahapesu või terrorismi rahastamise eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt?
Viide seadusele:
9 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RHS § 95 lg 1 p 1 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud rahapesualase süüteo või terrorismi rahastamise eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
LASTE TÖÖJÕU KASUTAMINE JA MUUD INIMKAUBANDUSE VORMID
Kas ettevõtja ise või tema haldus-, juht- või järelevalveorgani liige või isik, kellel on volitused seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on lõpliku süüdimõistva kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud laste tööjõu kasutamise või muude inimkaubanduse vormide eest kõige rohkem viimase viie aasta jooksul või kehtib süüdimõistvas kohtuotsuses sätestatud kõrvalejäämise kohustus endiselt?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 3 "keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud laste tööjõu ebaseadusliku kasutamise või inimkaubandusega seotud teo eest". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
8. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
9. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
11. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring karistusregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
10 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
B: Kõrvalejätmise alused seoses maksude või sotsiaalkindlustusmaksete tasumisega
MAKSUDE TASUMINE
Kas ettevõtja on rikkunud oma maksude tasumise kohustusi nii asukohariigis kui ka avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija liikmesriigis, kui see erineb asukohariigist?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 4 „kellel on riikliku maksu, makse või keskkonnatasu maksuvõlg maksukorralduse seaduse tähenduses või maksuvõlg /…/ tema asukohariigi õigusaktide kohaselt“
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Tingimuse kirjeldus: Piirmäär: 0
Valuuta: EUR
Lisainfo: Maksukorralduse seaduse kohaselt ei väljasta maksuhaldur maksuvõlgade tõendit juhul,kui maksukohustuslasel olev kõikide sama maksuhalduri hallatavate maksude võlg, arvestamata haldusaktiga kindlaksmääramata intressi, on väiksem kui 100 eurot või kui maksuvõla tasumine on ajatatud. Välismaise ettevõtja puhul väljastatakse maksuvõlgade tõend tema asukohariigi õigusaktide kohaselt.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
12. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
13. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
15. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring EMTA maksuvõlglaste andmebaasi riigihangete registri kaudu.
SOTSIAALKINDLUSTUSMAKSETE TASUMINE
Kas ettevõtja on rikkunud oma sotsiaalkindlustusmaksete tasumise kohustusi nii asukohariigis kui ka avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija liikmesriigis, kui see erineb asukohariigist?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 4 „kellel on riikliku /…/ makse /…/ maksuvõlg maksukorralduse seaduse tähenduses või sotsiaalkindlustusemaksete võlg tema asukohariigi õigusaktide kohaselt
Kehtib: Kõik osad
11 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Tingimuse kirjeldus: Piirmäär: 0
Valuuta: EUR
Lisainfo: Maksukorralduse seaduse kohaselt ei väljasta maksuhaldur maksuvõlgade tõendit juhul,kui maksukohustuslasel olev kõikide sama maksuhalduri hallatavate maksude võlg, arvestamata haldusaktiga kindlaksmääramata intressi, on väiksem kui 100 eurot või kui maksuvõla tasumine on ajatatud. Välismaise ettevõtja puhul väljastatakse maksuvõlgade tõend tema asukohariigi õigusaktide kohaselt.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
12. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
13. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
15. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring EMTA maksuvõlglaste andmebaasi riigihangete registri kaudu.
C: Kõrvalejätmise alused seoses maksejõuetusega, huvide konfliktiga või ametialaste käitumisreeglite rikkumisega
KOKKULEPE VÕLAUSALDAJATEGA
Kas ettevõtja on sõlminud kokkuleppe võlausaldajatega?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kes on muus sellesarnases olukorras tema asukohamaa õigusaktide kohaselt, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
SISERIIKLIKU ÕIGUSE KOHANE SAMALAADNE OLUKORD, NÄITEKS PANKROT
Kas ettevõtja on siseriiklike õigusnormide alusel toimuva samalaadse menetluse tõttu samalaadses olukorras?
Viide seadusele:
12 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kes on muus sellesarnases olukorras tema asukohamaa õigusaktide kohaselt“, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
5. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
7. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring Äriregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
VARA HALDAB LIKVIDEERIJA
Kas ettevõtja vara haldab likvideerija või kohus?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kes on pankrotis, likvideerimisel või kelle suhtes on algatatud pankrotimenetlus või kes on muus sellesarnases olukorras tema asukohamaa õigusaktide kohaselt, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
5. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
7. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring Äriregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
ÄRITEGEVUS ON PEATATUD
Kas ettevõtja äritegevus on peatatud?
Viide seadusele:
13 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kelle äritegevus on peatatud, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
5. URL (Url) Vastus: https://ariregister.rik.ee/
7. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: https://ariregister.rik.ee/
SÜÜDI AMETIALASTE KÄITUMISREEGLITE OLULISES RIKKUMISES
Kas ettevõtja on süüdi ametialaste käitumisreeglite olulises rikkumises? Vt siseriiklikud õigusaktid, asjaomane teade või hankedokumendid, kui see on asjakohane.
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 4 „kes on raskelt eksinud ametialaste käitumisreeglite vastu ja see muudab tema aususe küsitavaks“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
KONKURENTSI MOONUTAMISE EESMÄRGIL TEISTE ETTEVÕTJATEGA
SÕLMITUD KOKKULEPPED
Kas ettevõtja on teiste ettevõtjatega sõlminud kokkuleppeid, mille eesmärk on moonutada konkurentsi?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 5 „konkurentsi kahjustava kokkuleppe, ettevõtjate ühenduse otsuse või kooskõlastatud tegevuse tõttu“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära
14 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
HANKEMENETLUSES OSALEMISEGA KAASNEV HUVIDE KONFLIKT
Kas ettevõtja on teadlik hankemenetluses osalemisega kaasnevast mis tahes huvide konfliktist siseriikliku õiguse, asjakohase teatise või hankedokumentide kohaselt?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 6 „kui huvide konflikti ei ole muude vahenditega võimalik vältida“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
3. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
OTSENE VÕI KAUDNE OSALEMINE KÄESOLEVA HANKEMENETLUSE
ETTEVALMISTAMISEL
Kas ettevõtja või temaga seotud ettevõtja on nõustanud avaliku sektori hankijat või võrgustiku sektori hankijat hankemenetluse ettevalmistamisel või olnud muul viisil seotud hankemenetluse ettevalmistamisega?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 7 „kelle pakkumuse või taotluse koostamisel on osalenud isik, kes on osalenud sama riigihanke ettevalmistamisel või on muul viisil hankijaga seotud, ja sellele isikule seetõttu teadaolev info annab talle eelise teiste riigihankes osalejate eest ning sellest tingitud konkurentsi moonutamist ei ole muude vahendistega võimalik vältida“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
15 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
3. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
ENNETÄHTAEGNE LÕPETAMINE, KAHJUTASU VÕI VÕRRELDAVAD
SANKTSIOONID
Kas ettevõtja on kogenud, et varasem riigihankeleping või võrgustiku sektori hankijaga sõlmitud varasem hankeleping või varasem kontsessioonileping on lõpetatud enneaegselt, või on määratud kahjutasu või sellega võrreldavad sanktsioonid seoses kõnealuse varasema lepinguga?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 8 „kes on oluliselt või pidevalt rikkunud eelnevalt sõlmitud hankelepingu olulist tingimust või hankelepingute olulisi tingimusi nii, et rikkumise tulemusena on lepingust taganetud või leping üles öeldud, hinda alandatud, hüvitatud kahju või makstud leppetrahvi". Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud. Alates 1.09.2017 alustatud hangete tulemusena sõlmitud riigihankelepingute kohta leiab infot riigihangete registrist.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
SÜÜDI VALEANDMETE ESITAMISES, ON JÄTNUD TEAVET ESITAMATA, EI SUUDA
NÕUTUD DOKUMENTE ESITADA, HANKINUD KÄESOLEVA MENETLUSE KOHTA
KONFIDENTSIAALSET TEAVET
Kas ettevõtja on olnud ühes järgmistest olukordadest: a) ta on kõrvalejätmise aluste puudumise või valikukriteeriumide täitmise kontrollimiseks nõutava teabe esitamisel esitanud valeandmeid; b) ta on jätnud sellist teavet esitamata; c) ta ei ole esitanud viivitamata avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija nõutud täiendavad dokumendid, ja d) ta on tegutsenud eesmärgiga mõjutada lubamatul viisil avaliku sektori hankija või võrgustiku sektori hankija otsustusprotsessi, et saada konfidentsiaalseid andmeid, mis võivad anda talle põhjendamatu eelise hankemenetluses, või hooletusest esitanud eksitavat teavet, mis võib oluliselt mõjutada kõrvalejätmise, valiku või lepingu hindamise kohta tehtavaid otsuseid?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 9 „kes on esitanud valeandmeid käesolevas paragrahvis sätestatud või RHS §- des 98-101 sätestatu alusel hankija kehtestatud kvalifitseerimise tingimustele vastavuse kohta“;
16 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RHS § 95 lg 4 p 9 „kes on jätnud andmed käesolevas paragrahvis sätestatud või käesoleva seaduse §-des 98-101 sätestatu alusel hankija kehtestatud kvalifitseerimise tingimustele vastavuse kohta esitamata“; RHS § 95 lg 4 p 9 „kes on jätnud käesoleva seaduse § 104 lõigete 7 ja 8 alusel hankija nõutud täiendavad dokumendid esitamata“; RHS § 95 lg 4 p 10 „kes on tegutsenud eesmärgiga mõjutada hankijat või esitanud hooletusest eksitavat teavet, mis on võinud mõjutada hankija otsuseid riigihankes, või on tegutsenud eesmärgiga saada konfidentsiaalset teavet, mis on võinud anda talle põhjendamatu eelise teiste riigihankes osalejate ees“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
KESKKONNAÕIGUSE VALDKONNAS KOHALDATAVATE KOHUSTUSTE TÄITMATA
JÄTMINE
Kas ettevõtja on enda teada rikkunud keskkonnaõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 2 „kes on rikkunud õigusaktidest või kollektiivlepingust tulenevaid keskkonnaõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
SOTSIAALÕIGUSE VALDKONNAS KOHALDATAVATE KOHUSTUSTE TÄITMATA
JÄTMINE
Kas ettevõtja on enda teada rikkunud sotsiaalõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi?
Viide seadusele:
17 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RHS § 95 lg 4 p 2 „kes on rikkunud õigusaktidest või kollektiivlepingust tulenevaid sotsiaalõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
TÖÖÕIGUSE VALDKONNAS KOHALDATAVATE KOHUSTUSTE TÄITMATA
JÄTMINE
Kas ettevõtja on enda teada rikkunud tööõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 2 „kes on rikkunud õigusaktidest või kollektiivlepingust tulenevaid tööõiguse valdkonnas kohaldatavaid kohustusi“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
5. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
PANKROT
Kas ettevõtja on pankrotis?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kes on pankrotis, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
18 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
5. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
7. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päring Äriregistrisse riigihangete registri kaudu.
MAKSEJÕUETUS
Kas ettevõtja suhtes on algatatud maksejõuetus- või likvideerimismenetlus?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 „kes on likvideerimisel või kelle suhtes on algatatud pankrotimenetlus, välja arvatud asjade ostmisel RHS § 49 lõikes 4 sätestatud juhul ja tingimustel“. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
4. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
5. URL (Url) Vastus: https://www.ametlikudteadaanded.ee/
7. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus: Päringut saab käsitsi teha veebilehel Ametlikud Teadaanded.
D: Ainult siseriiklikest õigusaktidest tulenevad kõrvalejätmise alused
AINULT SISERIIKLIKEST ÕIGUSAKTIDEST TULENEVAD KÕRVALEJÄTMISE
ALUSED: SEADUSLIKU ALUSETA VIIBIVALE VÄLISMAALASELE TÖÖTAMISE
VÕIMALDAMISE EEST
Kas ettevõtja on rikkunud RHS § 95 lg 1 p-st 2 tuleneva kõrvalejätmise alusega seotud kohustusi?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 2 „keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget, prokuristi või muud isikut, kellel on volitus seda ettevõtjat esindada, tema nimel otsuseid teha või teda kontrollida, on karistatud riigis ilma seadusliku aluseta viibivale välismaalasele töötamise võimaldamise või välismaalase Eestis töötamise tingimuste rikkumise võimaldamise, sealhulgas seaduses sätestatud töötasu määrast väiksema töötasu maksmise eest“. Kohustuslik kõrvaldamise
19 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
alus. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
3. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
5. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus:Välismaalasele töötamise võimaldamine, maksualased süüteod, kohalik maks Tallinna
hankijatele päringuga RHRist. Rahvusvahelised sanktsioonid https://www.politsei.ee/et/rahapesu/
AINULT SISERIIKLIKEST ÕIGUSAKTIDEST TULENEVAD KÕRVALEJÄTMISE
ALUSED: RAHVUSVAHELISE SANKTSIOONI SUBJEKT
Kas ettevõtja on rikkunud RHS § 95 lg 1 p-st 5 tuleneva kõrvalejätmise alusega seotud kohustusi?
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 1 p 5. Alates 14.08.2022 kontrollib hankija kõrvaldamise aluse puudumist pakkuja või taotleja kinnituse alusel. Hankija võib põhjendatud kahtluse korral nõuda pakkujalt või taotlejalt täiendavate andmete või tõendite esitamist, mis võimaldavad kõrvaldamise alust kontrollida (RHS § 96 lg 2.1).
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
3. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
5. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus:Välismaalasele töötamise võimaldamine, maksualased süüteod, kohalik maks Tallinna
hankijatele päringuga RHRist. Rahvusvahelised sanktsioonid https://www.politsei.ee/et/rahapesu/
AINULT SISERIIKLIKEST ÕIGUSAKTIDEST TULENEVAD KÕRVALEJÄTMISE
ALUSED: KARISTATUD MAKSUALASTE SÜÜTEGUDE EEST
Kas ettevõtja on rikkunud RHS § 95 lg 4 p-st 11 tuleneva kõrvalejätmise alusega seotud kohustusi?
20 / 20
Koostatud 27.07.2023 10:13:15 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Viide seadusele: RHS § 95 lg 4 p 11 „keda või kelle haldus-, juhtimis- või järelevalveorgani liiget või muud seaduslikku esindajat on karistatud maksualaste süütegude eest“. Vabatahtlik kõrvaldamise alus. Kui hankemenetlusest kõrvaldamise alus esineb, võib ettevõtja soovi korral esitada tõendeid selle kohta, et ta on võtnud meetmeid oma usaldusväärsuse taastamiseks. Heastamise võimalus on ettevõtjal juhul, kui tegemist on rahvusvahelist piirmäära ületava hankega või hankija on selle hanke alusdokumentides ette näinud.
Kehtib: Kõik osad
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Mis on Teie vastus? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Ei
2. Kas see teave on elektrooniliselt kättesaadav? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei") Vastus: Jah
3. URL (Url) Vastus: https://riigihanked.riik.ee
5. Väljaandja (Sisestusväli (max pikkus 250 tähemärki)) Vastus:Välismaalasele töötamise võimaldamine, maksualased süüteod, kohalik maks Tallinna
hankijatele päringuga RHRist. Rahvusvahelised sanktsioonid https://www.politsei.ee/et/rahapesu/
Kokkuvõtlikud kinnitused
Ettevõtja kinnitab, et esitatud teave on täpne ja õige ning et ta on teadlik valeandmete esitamise tagajärgedest. Ettevõtja kinnitab, et tal on võimalik vajaduse korral viivitamata tema kinnitustele vastavad dokumendid hankijale esitada. Ettevõtja kinnitab, et ta on nõus oma kinnitustele vastavate andmete väljastamisega hankijale, kui need andmed on avalike andmete põhjal hankijale oluliste kulutusteta elektroonilisest andmekogust kättesaadavad.
Kinnituse andja nimi: Rene Randrüüt
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:51 1 / 4 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/ 5619440/general-info
PAKKUMUS HINDAMISKRITEERIUMID JA HINNATAVAD NÄITAJAD
Viitenumber: 261480 Hankija: Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Hange: Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog) Pakkumus: 438327 Ettevõtja: ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing (10672508), roll: peapakkuja
OSA 4 – OSA 4 - A3 KLASS 2 PRINTERI_V SOETUS
Pakkumuse maksumust hinnatakse - Ilma maksudeta
1. Põhitoodete maksumus
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kulu, vähim on parim
Osakaal: 50%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Kuni 11.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "madalaim väärtus" / "pakkumuse väärtus" * "osakaal". Alates 12.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "osakaal" - ("pakkumuse väärtus" - madalaim väärtus") / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
a. 10 printeri väljaostu maksumus Käesolevasse kriteeriumisse lisab pakkuja 10 printeri väljaostu maksumuse (müügihinna) kokku
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
15500,000
b. 7 printeri rendiperioodi rendimakse maksumus kokku Käesolevasse kriteeriumisse lisab pakkuja 7 printeri rendiperioodi maksumuse kokku. Iga seadme rendiperioodina arvestatakse 48 kuud (7 printeri rendiperioodi kogumaksumus x48 kuud). Märgitud kogus on arvestuslik pakkumuste võrreldavuse tagamiseks ja ühe ühiku maksumuse väljaselgitamiseks.
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
3696,000
2. Täishooldusteenuse maksumus (must-valge).
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:51 2 / 4 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/ 5619440/general-info
Printeri täishooldusteenuse 1 must-valge lehekülje printimise maksumus. 1 must-valge lehekülje printimise maksumus märgitakse e-kataloogis vastavalt hanke alusdokumentides kirjeldatule.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kulu, vähim on parim
Osakaal: 10%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Kuni 11.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "madalaim väärtus" / "pakkumuse väärtus" * "osakaal". Alates 12.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "osakaal" - ("pakkumuse väärtus" - madalaim väärtus") / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
0,029 lk
3. Täishooldusteenuse maksumus (värviline) Printeri täishooldusteenuse 1 värvilise lehekülje printimise maksumus. 1 värvilise lehekülje printimise maksumus märgitakse e-kataloogis vastavalt hanke alusdokumentides kirjeldatule.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kulu, vähim on parim
Osakaal: 10%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Kuni 11.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "madalaim väärtus" / "pakkumuse väärtus" * "osakaal". Alates 12.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "osakaal" - ("pakkumuse väärtus" - madalaim väärtus") / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
0,065 lk
4. Lisatoodete maksumus kokku
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Maksumus, vähim on parim
Osakaal: 15%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Kuni 11.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "madalaim väärtus" / "pakkumuse väärtus" * "osakaal". Alates 12.05.2023: Madalaima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte arvutades valemiga: "osakaal" - ("pakkumuse väärtus" - madalaim väärtus") / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
a. Väljaostetavate lisatoodete maksumus kokku
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:51 3 / 4 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/ 5619440/general-info
i. Tootja garantii 3 aastat
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
5 tk 0,001 0,005 20 0,006
ii. Klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
6 tk 50,000 300,000 20 360,000
iii. Klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
2 tk 200,000 400,000 20 480,000
iv. Printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
4 tk 0,001 0,004 20 0,0048
v. Aluskapp
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
6 tk 10,000 60,000 20 72,000
b. Renditavate lisatoodete maksumus kokku
i. Klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja rendimakse 48 kuu kohta kokku
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
4 tk 50,000 200,000 20 240,000
ii. Klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja rendimakse 48 kuu kohta kokku
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
3 tk 100,000 300,000 20 360,000
iii. Printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus rendimakse 48 kuu kohta kokku
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:51 4 / 4 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/ 5619440/general-info
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
2 tk 48,000 96,000 20 115,200
iv. Aluskapi rendimakse 48 kuu kohta kokku
Kogus Ühik Ühiku hind Maksumus KM% Maksumus KM-ga Märkused
4 tk 0,001 0,004 20 0,0048
5. Eesti keelse menüü olemasolu
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, hankija hinnatav
Osakaal: 10%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: 10 punkti saab pakkumus, kui printeril on eesti keelne menüü. 0 punkti saab pakkumus, kui printeril ei ole eesti keelset menüüd.
6. Blue Angel sertifikaat
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, hankija hinnatav
Osakaal: 5%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: 5 punkti saab pakkumus, kui printeril on Blue Angel sertifikaat. 0 punkti saab pakkumus, kui printeril ei ole Blue Angel sertifikaati.
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ta: 1356,013
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ga: 1627,2156
Pakkumuse maksumus kokku Maksumus kokku KM-ta: 1356,013
Maksumus kokku KM-ga: 1627,2156
1 / 5
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:52 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
PAKKUMUS VASTAVUSTINGIMUSED Viitenumber: 261480 Hankija: Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Hange: Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog) Pakkumus: 438327 Ettevõtja: ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing (10672508), roll: peapakkuja
OSA 4: OSA 4 - A3 KLASS 2 PRINTERI_V SOETUS
ÜHISPAKKUJATE VOLIKIRI Ühispakkujad nimetavad riigihankega ning hankelepingu sõlmimise ja täitmisega seotud toimingute tegemiseks endi seast volitatud esindaja.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas tegemist on ühispakkumusega? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on ühispakkumusega, kas olete lisanud pakkumuse "Lisadokumentide" lehele ühispakkujate volikirja? Kui tegemist ei ole ühispakkumusega, vastake "Ei"". (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
PAKKUMUSE ESITAMINE Pakkumuse esitamisega kinnitab pakkuja kõigi riigihanke alusdokumentides esitatud tingimuste ülevõtmist.
Tingimusliku pakkumuse esitamine ei ole lubatud.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas ettevõtja saab kinnitada, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides sätestatud tingimustele? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
PAKKUMUSE MAKSUMUS Pakkumuse maksumus tuleb esitada töölehel "Hindamiskriteeriumid ja hinnatavad näitajad" toodud struktuuri kohaselt.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas ettevõtja kinnitab, et täidab pakkumuse lehe "Hindamiskriteeriumid ja hinnatavad näitajad" lehel ette antud struktuuri kohaselt? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
ÄRISALADUS Pakkuja märgib pakkumuses, milline teave on pakkuja ärisaladus ning põhjendab teabe määramist ärisaladuseks.
Teabe ärisaladuseks määramisel lähtutakse ebaausa konkurentsi takistamise ja ärisaladuse kaitse seaduse § 5 lõikes 2 sätestatust. Pakkuja ei või ärisaladusena märkida: 1) pakkumuse maksumust ega osamaksumusi; 2) teenuste hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid numbrilisi näitajaid; 3) asjade ja ehitustööde hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid näitajaid (RHS § 46.1).
2 / 5
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:52 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kirjeldage lühidalt pakkumuses sisalduvat ärisaladust ja lisage selle määramise põhjendus või märkige, et pakkumus ei sisalda ärisaladust. (Suur sisestusala (max pikkus 4000 tähemärki))
Vastus: pakkumus ei sisalda ärisaladust.
SAMAVÄÄRSUS Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides nõutule ja vajadusel on samaväärsus selgitatud ja tõendid samaväärsuse kohta lisatud.
Iga viidet, mille hankija teeb riigihanke alusdokumentides mõnele RHS-i § 88 lõikes 2 nimetatud alusele (standardile, tehnilisele tunnustusele, tehnilisele kontrollisüsteemile vms), tuleb lugeda selliselt, et see on täiendatud märkega „või sellega samaväärne“. Iga viidet, mille hankija teeb riigihanke alusdokumentides ostuallikale, protsessile, kaubamärgile, patendile, tüübile, päritolule, tootmisviisile, märgisele või vastavushindamisasutuse väljastatud katsearuandele või tõendile, tuleb lugeda selliselt, et see on täiendatud märkega „või sellega samaväärne“ (RHS § 88 lg-d 5-6, § 89 lg 2, 114 lg-d 5-7). Hankija aktsepteerib objektiivsetel põhjustel muid asjakohaseid tõendeid, kui pakkuja tõendab hankijale vastuvõetaval viisil, et pakutav asi, teenus või ehitustöö vastab konkreetse märgise või hankija esitatud nõuetele, välja arvatud juhul, kui hankija nõutud märgis, samaväärne märgis või konkreetse või samaväärse vastavushindamisasutuse väljastatud katsearuanne või muu tõend on seaduse alusel eelduseks asja, teenuse või ehitustöö pakkumiseks turul (RHS § 114 lg 7).
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides nõutule ja vajadusel on samaväärsus selgitatud ja tõendid samaväärsuse kohta lisatud. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
EL NÕUKOGU SANKTSIOON. ALLTÖÖVÕTJAD, TARNIJAD JA TUGINETAVAD
ISIKUD. Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele alltöövõtjaid, tarnijaid ega tugine kvalifitseerimistingimuste täitmisel selliste ettevõtjate näitajatele, kes on: 1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu üksus; 2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse omandis; 3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või tegutseb sellise isiku juhiste alusel. Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel tühine.
Määrust kohaldatakse riigihangetele alates rahvusvahelisest piirmäärast. NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS (EL) 2022/576, 8. aprill 2022, millega muudetakse määrust (EL) nr 833/2014, mis käsitleb piiravaid meetmeid seoses Venemaa tegevusega, mis destabiliseerib olukorda Ukrainas.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele alltöövõtjaid, tarnijaid ega tugine kvalifitseerimistingimuste täitmisel selliste ettevõtjate näitajatele, kes on: 1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu üksus; 2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse omandis; 3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või tegutseb sellise isiku juhiste alusel. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
3 / 5
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:52 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
RAHVUSVAHELISE SANKTSIOONI OBJEKT Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks või pärit sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel tühine.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks ega pärit sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
AVALDUS HANKEMENETLUSES OSALEMISEKS
Pakkuja peab esitama vormikohase avalduse (PAA1) hankemenetlusel osalemiseks.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Vorm PAA1 Avaldus hankemenetlusel osalemiseks (Dokumendi vorm / vorm PAA1 Avaldus hankemenetlusel osalemiseks.docx)
Vastus: 4_8_1_vorm PAA1 Avaldus hankemenetlusel osalemiseks.asice
E-KATALOOGI SISESTATUD TOODETE JA TEENUSTE VASTAVUS
Hankijal on õigus lükata pakkumus tagasi, kui e-kataloogi sisestatud pakkumus sisaldab tooteid või teenuseid, mida ei olnud nimetatud hanke alusdokumentides, konkreetses osas või pakkuja sisestatud toodete või teenuste info ei vasta hanke alusdokumentide nõuetele.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas e-kataloogi sisestatud tooted ja teenused vastavad hanke alusdokumentides nõutud tingimustele? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
TOOTJAPOOLNE GARANTII KINNITUS
Hankijal peab olema võimalik printeri garantiiperioodi kestust kontrollida tootja veebilehelt. Kirjeldada, kuidas hankija kontrolli teostada hiljem saab (nt kas selleks on vaja kontot sisselogimisega, see on avalik jne)
Lisaks esitab pakkuja pakutava printeri kohta tootjapoolse garantii kinnituse, kus kinnitatakse tootjagarantii tagamist printeritele.
Garantiitingimusi vaata täpsemalt Lisa 6 Hankelepingu projekt p 17.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Tootja poolt väljastatud garantii kinnitus (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_10_1_Letter for RIK_2.pdf
PRINTERI JA LISATOODETE TOOTJAPOOLNE SPETSIFIKATSIOON
Pakkuja peab esitama printeri tootjapoolse spetsifikatsiooni ja lisatoodete tootjapoolse spetsifikatsiooni (lisada olemasolul), mis võimaldab hankijal kontrollida pakkumuse vastavust tehnilises kirjelduses loetletud tingimustele.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Printeri ja lisatoodete tootjapoolne spetsifikatsioon (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_11_1_Xerox C7130 spetsifikatsioon.pdf
4 / 5
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:52 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
ASJA MÜÜGIÕIGUSE KINNITUS
Pakkuja peab esitama asja tootja müügiesinduse kinnituse (st et edasimüüja on tootja tooteesindaja asja müügi regioonis).
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Tootja poolt väljastatud asja müügiesinduse kinnitus (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_12_1_Letter for RIK_3.pdf
ASJA REMONDI- JA HOOLDUSE TEGEMISE ÕIGUSE KINNITUS
Pakkuja peab esitama tootja poolt väljastatud kinnituse, et tema või tema koostööpartner on tootja ametlik koostööpartner remondile ja hooldusele. Koostööpartneri kasutamisel esitada ka koostööpartneri nõusolek remondi- ja hoolduse tegemiseks.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Tootja poolt väljastatud asja remondi- ja hoolduse tegemise õiguse kinnitus kas pakkujale või tema koostööpartnerile. (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_13_1_Letter for RIK_2.pdf
2. Kas pakkuja teostab remonti ja hooldust ise? "Ei" vastuse korral lisage pakkumuse dokumentide juurde koostooparneri kinnitus remondi- ja hoolduse tegemise nõusolekuga. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
EESTI KEELSE MENÜÜ OLEMASOLU
Pakkuja poolt e-kataloogis esitatud printeril on eesti keelne menüü. Tingimus on vajalik hindamiseks. "Ei" valik ei too kaasa pakkuja mittevastavaks tunnistamise.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas pakkuja kinnitab, et e-kataloogis esitatud printeril on eesti keelne menüü? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
BLUE ANGEL SERTIFIKAAT
Pakkuja poolt e-kataloogis esitatud printeril on Blue Angel sertifikaat. Tingimus on vajalik hindamiseks. "Ei" valik ei too kaasa pakkuja mittevastavaks tunnistamise.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Kas pakkuja kinnitab, et e-kataloogis esitatud printeril on Blue Angel sertifikaat? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
PAKKUMUSES ESITATAVATE ASJADE VASTAVUSTABEL
Pakkuja esitab iga osa koosseisus täidetud tabeli vastava osa andmetega etteantud vormil.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Pakkumuse vastavustabel (Dokumendi vorm / Lisa 10 Pakkumuse vastavustabel_Osa 1-7_12072023.xlsx)
Vastus: 4_16_1_4_16_1_Lisa 10 Pakkumuse vastavustabel_Osa 4 A3 klass 2.xlsx
5 / 5
Koostatud 28.07.2023 11:09:52 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info
PAKENDAMINE
Pakkuja poolt e-kataloogis toodete valikuna esitatud asjade (sh lisatoodete) pakendites ei tohi olla kasutatud mürgiseid aineid, sh. raskemetalle. Esitada seda nõuet kinnitavad dokumendid või tõendusmaterjalid.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Nõuet kinnitav dokument või tõendusmaterjal, et asjade (sh lisatoodete) pakendites ei ole kasutatud mürgiseid aineid, sh. raskemetalle. (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_17_1_Letter for RIK_4.pdf, 4_17_1_Packaging_FILE_EHSA_XRX_INFO_REQUIREMENTS_710.pdf
PAKENDAMINE
Pakkuja poolt e-kataloogis toodete valikuna esitatud asjade (sh lisatoodete) pakendamiseks kasutavad plastmaterjalid ei tohi sisaldada halogeene sisaldavaid polümeere (näiteks PVC-d). Esitada seda nõuet kinnitav dokument või tõendusmaterjal.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused: 1. Nõuet kinnitav dokument või tõendusmaterjal, et asjade (sh lisatoodete) pakendamiseks kasutavad plastmaterjalid ei sisaldada halogeene sisaldavaid polümeere (näiteks PVC-d). (Vabas vormis dokument)
Vastus: 4_18_1_Letter for RIK_4.pdf, 4_18_1_Packaging_FILE_EHSA_XRX_INFO_REQUIREMENTS_710.pdf
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Reference number 261480 Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)
We hereby declare that ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ is Xerox Master Authorized Service Partner and is authorized by Xerox Ltd. to act as primary service center in Estonia, has the right to perform warranty and guarantee maintenance services for Xerox printers and MFP.
We confirm that Xerox multifunctional printers offered by ABom Kaubanduse OÜ are manufactured by Xerox company and have an official warranty time as required, which are provided by local authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ.
Contracting authorities are able to control the duration of the warranty terms through Xerox authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ in Baltics. We confirm that contractor can request information regarding warranty for offered printers ([email protected]). Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
System Specifications VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
One-sided Speed1
8.5 x 11 in./A4/210 x 297 mm Up to 20 ppm (pages per minute) long edge feed (LEF)
Up to 25 ppm LEF Up to 30 ppm LEF
8.5 x 14 in./216 x 356 mm
11 x 17 in./A3/297 x 420 mm
Up to 13 ppm
Up to 11 ppm
Up to 16 ppm
Up to 14 ppm
Up to 20 ppm
Up to 17 ppm
Two-sided Speed1
8.5 x 11 in./A4/210 x 297 mm
8.5 x 14 in./216 x 356 mm
11 x 17 in./A3/297 x 420 mm
Up to 20 ppm LEF
Up to 9 ppm
Up to 8 ppm
Up to 25 ppm LEF
Up to 10 ppm
Up to 9 ppm
Up to 30 ppm LEF
Up to 12 ppm
Up to 11 ppm
Monthly Duty Cycle2 Up to 87,000 pages/month2 Up to 107,000 pages/month2 Up to 129,000 pages/month2
Recommended Average Monthly Print Volume3
Up to 5,500 pages Up to 6,250 pages Up to 7,000 pages
Hard Drive 320 GB HDD (Optional on Desktop/Base Unit)
Processor 1.05 GHz Dual-Core
Memory 4 GB
Connectivity Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T, High-speed USB 3.0, Wi-Fi 802.11n/g/b/a, Wi-Fi Direct, and Bluetooth (iBeacon) with optional Wi-Fi Kit (concurrent wired and wireless connections supported), NFC Tap-to-Pair
Controller Features Embedded Security and Integrity Control, TLS1.3 Support, NIST800-171r1 Compliance Print on Available Media, Mopria, Remote Install Wizard - Secure Fax Remote Enable/Disable, Air Print
User Interface Languages English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, Russian, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Norwegian, Greek, Turkish, Polish, Arabic, Czech, Hungarian, Romanian, Catalan, Ukrainian, Croatian
Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series Color Multifunction Printers are built on Xerox® ConnectKey® Technology. For more information, go to www.connectkey.com.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Device Specifications
Electrical Requirements
North America Voltage: 110-127 V -10%/+6% Frequency: 50/60 Hz +/-3%, 12A
Europe and Other Geographies Voltage: 220-240 V +/-10% Frequency: 50 Hz +/-3%, 8A
Power Consumption
Printing4 For 110 V and 220 V: 20 ppm = 0.3 kWh or less; 25 ppm = 0.4 kWh or less; 30 ppm = 0.52 kWh or less
Standby Mode4 94 watts or less
Sleep Mode4 0.4 watts or less
Operating Environment
Required Temperature Range (Storage) 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)
Required Temperature Range (Operating) 50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Required Relative Humidity 10% to 85%
Sound Power Levels Printing: 6.9 B(A) or less
• 20 ppm = 6.45 B(A); 25 ppm = 6.50 B(A); 30 ppm = 6.9 B(A)
Standby: 4.10 B(A) or less
• 20 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 25 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 30 ppm = 4.10 B(A)
Full System (including Finisher and HCF) Printing: 20 ppm = 7.15 B(A); 25 ppm = 7.18 B(A); 30 ppm = 7.35 B(A) Standby: 20 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 25 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 30 ppm = 4.10 B(A)
Boot Time (from Off to UI Ready) As fast as 60 seconds
Warm-up Time (from Sleep to UI Ready)
As fast as 12 seconds
Dimensions and Weight (Unpackaged)
Width Depth Height Weight
Base Unit (Desktop Model) 23.23 in./590 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 30.18 in./766.5 mm 137.9 lbs./62.5 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 196 lbs./88.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 220.5 lbs./100 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 200.4 lbs./90.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Office Finisher (with Booklet Maker)
44.69 in./1135.2 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in/1117.2 mm 277.5 lbs./125.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Integrated Office Finisher 25.98 in./659.9 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 224.9 lbs./102 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module, Office Finisher, Booklet Maker, and High Capacity Feeder
57.1 in./1451.4 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 346 lbs./156.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module and Integrated Office Finisher
26.3 in./668.0 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 244.9 lbs./111.1 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module, Office Finisher, Booklet Maker, and High Capacity Feeder
57.1 in./1451.4 mm 26.71 in./678.6mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 366 lbs./166 kg
Certifications
To view the latest list of certifications, go to www.xerox.com/OfficeCertifications.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer Configuration
I N C R E A S E V E R S AT I L I T Y W I T H F I N I S H I N G O P T IO N S 5M A X I M I Z E PA P E R C A PA C I T Y W I T H O N E O F T H E S E F E E DI N G O P T IO N S 5
The Office Finisher provides advanced finishing functions, 500-sheet stacker, 3-position stapling, and optional hole punch.
Card Reader Bay and embedded USB port.6
130-sheet5 Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) saves time by simultaneously scanning both sides of two-sided documents with up to 80 impressions per minute (ipm). High paper capacity drives productivity, especially for tasks that require large batches of scanned or copied documents.
The 100-sheet Bypass Tray handles media sizes from 3.5 x 3.87 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The standard 520-sheet5 Tray 1 handles media sizes from 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./ 139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The Dual Off-set Catch Trays7
stack up to 250 sheets each. The Integrated Office Finisher provides 500-sheet stacking and 50-sheet, dual position stapling.
The Work Surface and Convenience Stapler staples up to 50 sheets and provides plenty of elbow room to sort documents.
User interface is an intuitive, tablet-like, 7-inch, tiltable touch screen that allows you to complete tasks in just a few effortless taps and lets you personalize your experience. Gain access to 100+ productivity apps through the Xerox App Gallery. Try it out at xerox.com/VersaLink7100UI.
The Single Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Stand Module offers total paper capacity of 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray) and provides storage for toner cartridges and other supplies
The Three Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 2,180 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Tandem Tray Module allows for total paper capacity of up to 3,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The High Capacity Feeder holds 2,000 sheets of Letter/A4 paper, increasing the maximum paper capacity to 5,140 sheets.
The Envelope Tray can replace Tray 1 to provide feeding of up to 60 envelopes.
The Office Finisher with Booklet Maker simplifies booklet making, including score and saddle-stitch. Use it to create 64-page saddle-stitched booklets (2 to 16 sheets).
5 Paper capacities are based on 20 lb/75 gsm stock; capacities will vary with different weight stocks. 6 USB ports can be disabled. 7 HDD and Dual Off-set Catch Trays are optional on Desktop model.
Print VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
First-Print-Out Time As fast as 8.8 seconds color As fast as 8.8 seconds color As fast as 7.0 seconds color
As fast as 6.9 seconds black As fast as 6.7 seconds black As fast as 5.4 seconds black
Print Resolution Up to 1200 x 2400 dpi
Page Description Languages PCL® 5e, 6 PDF TIFF JPEG HP-GL Adobe® PostScript® 3™ (Optional)
Maximum Print Area 4 mm from Lead edge of paper, 2 mm from Side and Trail edges of paper
Print Features Application Defaults Banner Pages Enable/Disable Bi-directional Real-time Status Booklet Layout Color Adjustments (lightness, contrast, saturation, color balance) Color Correction Draft Mode Finishing Fit to New Paper Size Job Identification (Print ID or Banner, Print ID in margins on first page only or all pages) Job Monitoring (Client or Local User Interface) LAN Fax (requires Fax Kit) N-up Page Layout (up to 16 pages per sheet) Paper Selection by Attribute Personal Print Print Around Enable/Disable Print from USB Sample Set Saved Job Scaling Secure Print Skip Blank Pages Special Pages (exception page programming: covers, inserts, exceptions pages) Store and Recall Driver Settings Stored Jobs Deletion Two-sided Printing (as default) Watermark (predefined and custom) Xerox® Earth Smart Driver Settings
Print from USB Allows walk-up printing from Type A USB port Supports direct printing from computer via Type B USB port Supported file formats: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, PDF/A
Operating Systems Windows®, 7, 8, 8.1, 10, 11 Windows Server 2008 SP2, Server 2008 R2 SP1, Server 2012, Server 2012 R2, Server 2016 Mac OS® version 10.12, 10.13, 10.14, 10.15, 11, 12 Citrix®
Redhat® Enterprise Linux®
Fedora Core SUSE®
SAP®
IBM® AIX®
HP-UX®
Oracle® Solaris Note: For information about supported versions for the above operating systems, please visit our Drivers & Downloads page and specify your device at www.support.xerox.com.
Fonts PostScript fonts: 136 PCL fonts: 83
Xerox® Global Print Driver® A truly universal print driver that lets IT administrators install, upgrade, and manage non-Xerox and Xerox® Devices from a single driver. It provides a consistent, easy-to-use interface for end-users, reducing the number of support calls and simplifying print services management
Xerox® Pull Print Driver Makes it easy for IT managers to qualify, deploy, and manage all print devices using a single driver in a Pull Print environment. Uses a single queue and driver. The Xerox® Pull Print Driver extends convenience across a broad range of printing assets. IT administrators no longer need to manage and configure multiple drivers. Used in conjunction with Equitrac Office®, Ysoft® SafeQ®, Pharos®, and others
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Copy VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
Document Scanner 130-sheet Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Document Scanner Size Platen: Up to 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm DADF: Up to 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm
Simplex Copy Speed Up to 20 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 20 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 25 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 25 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 30 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 30 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Duplex Copy Speed Up to 20 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 20 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 25 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 25 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 30 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 30 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
First-Copy-Out Time As fast as 8.1 seconds color As fast as 8.1 seconds color As fast as 6.7 seconds color
As fast as 5.7 seconds black As fast as 5.7 seconds black As fast as 4.4 seconds black
Sides (input:output) 1:1, 1:2, 2:2, and 2:1
Quantity 1 to 999
Resolution (max.) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Reduction/Enlargement Variable zoom from 25% to 400% in 1% increments
Concurrency Concurrent scanning and printing
Copy Features Annotation (Page Numbers, Comments, Date Stamp, Bates Stamping)* Auto-color Sensing Automatic Background Suppression Book Copying with Center Erase Booklet Copying* Collation Color Balance Color Effects Darkness Control Edge Erase Front Cover ID Card Copy Image Enhancement Image Shift Lighten/Darken N-up Original Orientation Original Size Original Type Page Layout Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 400% Sample Copy Saturation Sharpness *Requires HDD/Productivity Kit
Scan
Capability Black-and-white and color scanning
Concurrency Scan while the system is printing copy or network print jobs, or while it is transferring scan to network or fax jobs
Simplex Input Speed Black-and-white: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 297 mm) Color: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./80 ipm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Duplex Input Speed Black-and-white: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 297 mm) Color: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./80 ipm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Resolution Optical – 600 x 600 dpi
Bit Depth 24-bit color/8-bit grayscale
Maximum Scan Area Platen: 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm Document Feeder: 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm
Network Filing Protocols FTP SMTP SMB
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Scan
File Formats JPG TIFF (single and multi-page) PDF (single and multi-page) Searchable PDF via Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Password-protected PDF Linearized PDF (set via embedded web server) and PDF/A
Scan Driver Compatibility (Network Only)
WIA TWAIN
Supported Scan Destinations Scan to Home Scan to USB Scan to Email Scan to Network (Browse FTP or Browse SMB)
Workflow Scanning (Optional Features)
Scanning Apps and Xerox App Gallery
Scan to: DocuShare Go, Dropbox, Google Drive, Microsoft OneDrive, Microsoft 365, Box, Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android). See the full list of apps available in the Xerox App Gallery: xerox.com/AppGallery
PSTN One-Line or Three-Line Fax (Optional) Fax8
Fax Speed 33.6 Kbps
Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi, Fine 200 x 200 dpi, Super Fine 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 dpi
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Fax Features Walk-up Fax, includes LAN Fax, Direct Fax, Fax Forward to Email, Fax dialing via Unified Address Book (up to 2,000 contacts)
Fax Over IP (Optional)
Compliance T.38 compliant IP/SIP
Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi, Fine 200 x 200 dpi, Super Fine 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 dpi
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Fax Features Walk-up Fax, includes LAN Fax, Direct Fax, Fax Forward to Email, Fax dialing via Unified Address Book (up to 2,000 contacts)
Mobile and Cloud Ready
Mobile Connectivity Near Field Communication (NFC); Optional: Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g/n/ac), AirPrint™ (iOS) including iBeacon (Bluetooth)
Mobile Printing Mopria® Scan, Apple AirPrint™, Xerox® Print Service (Android), @PrintByXerox App; Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android), AirPrint™ (iOS) including iBeacon (Bluetooth)
Mobile Scanning Mopria® Scan, Apple AirPrint™, Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android)
Mobile Apps and Xerox App Gallery
Automate everyday processes with apps that translate, redact, eSign, personalize, print, convert, route, collaborate, and communicate. Visit xerox.com/WorkplaceApps to find apps by industry or workflow. Software and services: Xerox® DocuShare® Content Management Platform (xerox.com/ecm), XMPie® (xerox.com/XMPie), Xerox® Workplace Solutions (xerox.com/WorkplaceSolutions)
Xerox® Workplace Central Platform
One-platform consistency for seamless productivity across computers, mobile devices, and printers. With the Workflow Central platform’s ever-expanding suite of cloud-based workflows, you can change documents into audio files for easy listening, convert PDF or image files to popular Microsoft formats for shareability with a wider audience, turn handwriting into legible, editable, and shareable text, translate to/from over 40 different languages, and automatically redact Personal Identifiable Information using set words or phrases
Xerox® Workplace Suite and Xerox® Workplace Cloud
Optional: Xerox® Workplace Suite is a modular set of workflows designed to save customer’s time and money by providing effective control over their print fleet, while enabling worker productivity and mobility through a set of robust workflows. Xerox enables ultimate customer flexibility by offering these capabilities in both an on-premises server version (Workplace Suite) and a cloud based-version (Workplace Cloud) of this solution
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Security
Security Features Access Controls AES 256-bit Encryption Audit Log Certificate Path Validation Certificate Revocation List (CRL)/Status Protocol (OCSP) Detection of External Program Falsification (XCP Plug-in) Cisco® Identity Services Engine (ISE) Integration Domain Filtering FIPS 140-2 Firmware Verification Immediate Disk Overwrite* IP Address Filtering IPsec Network Authentication NIST800-171r1 Compliance Port Filtering Pre-installed Self-Signed Certificates Role-based Permissions Secure Email Secure Fax Secure Print Security Certificate Management Smart Card Enablement (CAC/PIV/.NET) SNMPv3 Status Protocol (OCSP) TLS1.3/SSL Support Trellix# – Embedded Control and Integrity Control Whitelisting *Requires HDD/Productivity Kit
Accounting
Xerox® Standard Accounting/Network Accounting (Standard)
Tracking Copy, Print, Fax, Scan, and Email usage
Accounting Xerox® Standard Accounting Feature Up to 1,000 User Accounts without HDD Up to 9,999 User Accounts with HDD Up to 500 General Accounts Network Accounting (Job-based Accounting) Up to 1,000 User IDs; Up to 1,000 Account IDs without HDD Up to 60,000 User IDs; Up to 60,000 Account IDs with HDD Up to 14,000 Accounting Records (transactions)
Features Administrator can manage the feature via the Embedded Web Server
Accounting Options – Network Accounting (Allows central server to manage all accounting)
• Enhanced network accounting with up to the minute data on how the system is being used • Comprehensive management and enterprise-scale tracking and reporting of device usage of copy, print,
scan, and fax • Numerous solutions are available through Xerox Alliance Partners. For details, visit www.xerox.com • Security enhancements include simultaneous support for HTTP/HTTPS protocols • Device requests account authentication from third party server enabling larger databases of users and accounts • Accept Authentication Login at control panel and pass to third party Networking Account
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
#Trellix formerly known as McAfee. Device firmware will reflect Trellix brand change in future software release.
Paper Handling
Document Feeder
Capacity5 Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF): 130 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 1.93 x 3.35 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./ 49 x 85 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
11 to 34 lb. bond/38 to 128 gsm 13 to 34 lb. bond/50 to 128 gsm
Bypass Tray
Capacity5 100 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 3.5 x 3.87 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 216 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Tray 1
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Extra Heavyweight Labels Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Single Tray Module (Optional – Base Model Only)
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Single Tray Module with Stand (Optional)
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Three Tray Module (Optional)
Capacity5 Tray 2: 520 sheets Tray 3: 520 sheets Tray 4: 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Heavyweight Labels Extra Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
High Capacity Tandem Tray Module (Optional)
Capacity5 Tray 2: 520 sheets Tray 3: 870 sheets Tray 4: 1,130 sheets
Sizes Tray 2: Custom Sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm Tray 3: Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5 Tray 4: Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Heavyweight Labels Extra Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Envelope Tray – Replaces Tray 1 (Optional)
Capacity5 Up to 60 envelopes
Sizes #10 commercial, Monarch, DL, C5 Custom sizes: 3.9 x 5.8 in. to 6.4 x 9.5 in./98 x 148 mm to 162 x 241 mm
Weights 20 to 25 lb. bond/75 to 90 gsm
High Capacity Feeder (Optional)
Capacity5 2,000 sheets
Sizes Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 216 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Total Capacity
Base Unit Capacity5 620 sheets
Single Tray Module Capacity5 1,140 sheets
Single Tray Module with Stand Capacity5
1,140 sheets
Three Tray Module Capacity5 2,180 sheets
High-Capacity Tandem Tray Capacity5
3,140 sheets
Finishing
Finishing Output Trays (Optional on Base Model)
Dual Off-set Catch Trays5 250 sheets each; Lower tray offsets
Integrated Office Finisher (Optional)
Stacking Tray 500 sheets of 20 lb. bond/80 gsm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 or 250 sheets of 20 lb. bond/80 gsm – 11 x 17 in./A3
Sizes 3.5 x 3.9 in. to 11.7 x 17 in./89 x 98 mm to 297 x 432 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm
Stapling Dual Auto Stapling 50 sheets maximum: Letter/A4/B5-size sheets (less than 90 gsm or (2) 220 gsm covers) 30 sheets maximum: Legal/Tabloid/A3/B4-size sheets (less than 90 gsm or (2) 220 gsm covers)
Office Finisher (Optional)
Capacity5 Stacking Tray: 2,000 sheets unstapled or 1,000 sheets single stapled or 750 sheets dual stapled (8.5 x 11 in./A4)
Sizes 5.8 x 5.8 in. to 11.7 x 17 in./148 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 220 gsm/Office Finisher GB up to 256 gsm
Multiposition Stapling 50 sheets of 24 lb. bond/90 gsm
Hole Punch (Optional) North America: Europe:
2-3 Hole Punch 2-4 Hole Punch
Booklet Maker for Office Finisher (Score/Crease, Saddle-Stitch Staple) (Optional)
Capacity5 40 booklets (2-15 sheets per booklet – 20 lb./80 gsm or less)
Sizes Letter – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 SEF Legal – 8.5 x 14 in./B4 SEF Ledger – 11 x 17 in./A3 SEF
Saddle-stitch Stapling 2-15 sheets/8-60 page booklet 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/64 to 220 gsm
Score/Crease 1-15 sheets/unstapled/52-105 gsm
Convenience Stapler and Work Surface (Optional)
Capacity5 50-sheet stapling 5,000 staples Requires a separate outlet
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Device Management
Network Protocols TCP/IP: HTTP/HTTPS, Internet Printing Protocol, LPR/LPD, Raw Socket Printing/Port 9100, IPv4/IPv6, WSD LDAP Bonjour®/AirPrint™ FTP Most protocols not in use can be disabled
Administrative Protocols DHCP, SNMP, WINS, HTTP, HTTPS, TLS, SNTP, MDNS
Management Support SNMP Version 1, SNMP Version 2c, and SNMP Version 3 trap over TCP/IP and IP MIB access (IETF-MIBII RFC 1213) Host Resources MIB RFC 2790, Printer MIB RFC 3805, PWG-Imaging-System- Power MIB, Xerox® Easy Assist App
Xerox® CentreWare® Web Software
• A web-based server application for network administrators that permits web browser-based device management from any workstation, running Windows, UNIX, or any other operating system
• Works with any SNMP-managed printer from any manufacturer • Provides help with device discovery and installations, health checks and troubleshooting, and device upgrades, as
well as basic accounting and asset management
Embedded Web Server – Integrated Device Web Page
Device Status • Tray Status/Contents • Consumables Status • Billing/Usage • Quick Links • Online Support
Print Queue Viewing Job print queue management — view and delete
Job Submission Print-ready files (PS (with optional PostScript option), PCL, PDF, JPEG)
Device Administration Allows simple, remote installation setting of configuration options and management of the device
Xerox® Device Manager Xerox® Device Manager collects and manages the data that drives fact-based decisions for your enterprise device management environment. It is a single tool to install print queues and configure, manage, monitor, and report on both networked and locally connected devices – regardless of vendor – across your enterprise. Xerox® Device Manager provides: • Device monitoring and troubleshooting • Remote configuration of SNMP v3 • Extensive reporting and discovery of new devices • Usage collection, chargeback, and billing capabilities • Auto-detect Xerox® Device Manager server and download configurations files for touchless remote install
Xerox® Workplace Cloud Remote management to set and audit device configuration data with Xerox® Workplace Cloud, eliminating the need for an on-site server
Browsers Microsoft® Internet Explorer® Microsoft Edge™ Mozilla™ Firefox® Apple® Safari® Google Chrome™
Remote Services
Automatic Meter Readings (AMR)
Automates the process of collecting and submitting meter reads for the tracking and billing of Xerox® Device usage. Eliminates the need for time-consuming end-user involvement and ensures that meter reads are submitted to Xerox on time
Automatic Supplies Replenishment (ASR)
Automatically orders supplies for output devices from Xerox based on actual usage, eliminating the need to manually manage supplies inventory
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Return spent imaging supplies through the Xerox® Green World Alliance® collection/reuse/recycling program. For more information, visit www.xerox.com/About-Xerox/Recycling.
For more information, visit us at www.xerox.com/Office.
Configurations vary by geography.
© 2023 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, CentreWare®, ConnectKey®, Global Print Driver®, and VersaLink® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information in this brochure is subject to change without notice. 01/23 TSK-3720 BR34254 VC7SS-02UB
1 Declared print speed in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734. 2 Maximum volume capacity expected in any one month. Not expected to be sustained on a regular basis. 3 Recommended average throughput is not a minimum, but is intended to cover a range of volumes for different environments. 4 Power states defined per ENERGY STAR® Program requirements for Imaging Equipment. 5 Paper capacities are based on 20 lb./75 gsm stock; capacities will vary with different weight stocks. 6 USB ports can be disabled. 7 HDD and Dual Off-set Catch Trays are optional on Desktop model. 8 Requires analog phone line. 9 Average standard pages. Declared yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Toner yield can vary due to many factors including, but not limited to,
image area coverage, image content, media size, run mode, application types, monthly print volumes, and image quality set-points. 10 Approximate pages. Declared yield will vary depending on job run length, media size/orientation, and machine speed.
For more information, visit: https://www.office.xerox.com/latest/SUPGL-01U.pdf.
Supplies Description Yield
Sold Toner Cartridges Cyan Magenta Yellow Black
18,500 standard pages9
18,500 standard pages9
18,500 standard pages9
31,300 standard pages9
Metered Toner Cartridges Cyan Magenta Yellow Black
20,300 standard pages 20,300 standard pages 20,300 standard pages 31,300 standard pages
Drum Cartridge Black Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
109,000 standard pages10
87,000 standard pages10
Waste Toner Bottle 1 Cartridge 30,000 pages
Booklet Maker Cartridge (8 cartridges per carton) 1 Cartridge Carton 16,000 staples
(2,000 each cartridge)
Staple Refills for Finishers (3 refills per carton) 1 Refill Carton 15,000 staples
(5,000 each refill)
Staple Cartridge for Finishers (1 cartridge per carton) 1 Cartridge 5,000 staples
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Reference number 261480 Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)
We hereby declare that ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ is Xerox Master Authorized Partner and has a right to sell all XEROX products in territory of Estonia.
Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Reference number 261480 Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)
We hereby declare that ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ is Xerox Master Authorized Service Partner and is authorized by Xerox Ltd. to act as primary service center in Estonia, has the right to perform warranty and guarantee maintenance services for Xerox printers and MFP.
We confirm that Xerox multifunctional printers offered by ABom Kaubanduse OÜ are manufactured by Xerox company and have an official warranty time as required, which are provided by local authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ.
Contracting authorities are able to control the duration of the warranty terms through Xerox authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ in Baltics. We confirm that contractor can request information regarding warranty for offered printers ([email protected]). Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern Dear Sir / Madam, This Letter serves to confirm the following:
The Xerox Versalink C7130 model and Xerox Altalink C8155 has no toxic substances used in packaging material, including heavy metals.
As well all plastic materials used for packaging do not contain halogen-containing polymers (such as PVC) Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
EHS-710
Environment, Health & Safety Requirements for
Packaging
Rev- P
Requirements for Packaging
© 2022 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox® and Xerox and Design® are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. BR25673
Other company trademarks are also acknowledged.
Document Version: Revision P (January 2022).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging i
Preface
• Questions regarding requirements contained in this standard should be directed to:
• This document is available on the internet at:
https://www.xerox.com/en-us/about/supplier-relations/packaging-standards
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging ii
Contents
1. EHS-710 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Scope .............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Objective ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
2. Definitions ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
3. Requirements (Mandatory) .......................................................................................................... 3-4
4. Best Practices (Preferred) ............................................................................................................ 4-7
5. Appendices .................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Appendix A: Harmonized Prohibited Substance List ...................................................................... 5-8
Appendix B: Material Identification .................................................................................................. 5-9
Appendix C: EH&S Labeling Guidelines ....................................................................................... 5-15
Appendix D: Supplier Letter .......................................................................................................... 5-16
Appendix E: Supplier Letter .......................................................................................................... 5-17
6. Revision History .......................................................................................................................... 6-19
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 1-1
1. EHS-710 Overview
Summary
This standard specifies the minimum environment, health, and safety requirements for packaging
of products, parts or materials shipped to any manufacturing site, distribution center or customer
from suppliers or other Xerox locations.
Scope
This standard applies to all Xerox organizations and third-party suppliers.
Objective
Comply with all applicable regulations, satisfy customer requirements, and achieve corporate waste
minimization goals. Any packaging that complies with this standard will be marked indicating its
material composition as reflected in Appendix B of this Standard and will be capable of being
recycled.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 2-2
2. Definitions
• Commingled plastic: a mixture of different plastics.
• Consumable: item consumed by the product during normal operation. Examples include, but
are not limited to, toner, ink, paper, drum cartridge, print cartridge, fuser, and developer and
photoreceptor. Also called Supply.
• Copolymer: a polymer consisting of two or more different monomers.
• Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU): customer installable item that requires scheduled
replacement. This is considered a consumable.
• Environmental claim: a statement, symbol or graphic that indicates an environmental aspect of
a product, component, or package.
• Field Replacement Unit (FRU): any assembly made available to support unscheduled
replacement of like parts in existing equipment.
• Incoming materials to manufacturing: any material and/or part coming into a manufacturing
facility that becomes assembled or made into a product.
• Manufactured wood packaging material: wood-based materials such as plywood, particle
board, oriented strand board, veneer and wood wool that have been created using glue, heat
and pressure.
• Machine: a product that performs a function on its own without the need of additional items.
Examples include, but are not limited to, printer or image output terminal (IOT), scanner or image
input terminal (IIT) and multifunction product (MFP).
• Mineral oil: An oil present in mixtures such as printing inks containing substances that disrupt
the recycling of packaging waste or limit the use of recycled material because of the risks these
substances present to human health
• Non-manufactured wood packaging material (NMWP): solid wood (usually softwood
[coniferous]) material that is used in the construction of crates, packing blocks, load boards,
pallet stringers and other material handling devices. Also called solid wood packing material
(SWPM).
• Option: items that are added to machines to provide additional capabilities. Examples include,
but are not limited to, second feeder, finisher, high capacity feeder and cart.
• Packaging: any item that is used to protect, contain and/or transport a product, part or material.
Packaging may be described as primary, secondary, or tertiary. Items that support the contents
throughout their functional lifetime and remain as part of the printer are not packaging (e.g.,
toner cartridges, ink cartridges, CRU’s).
• Pre-consumer waste: material, generated during a manufacturing process, which is diverted
from the waste stream for another use. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework,
regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process
that generated it.
• Primary packaging: the first wrap or containment of a product. Contains the product or material
(e.g., a box holding transparencies, a carton container toner cartridge).
• Post-consumer waste: material generated by consumers or businesses after using a product to
the point that it is no longer usable for its intended purpose. This includes material returned
through the distribution chain.
• Recycled content: proportion, by weight, of recycled material.
• Recycled packaging: packaging reprocessed from recovered material.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 2-3
• Recyclable packaging: packaging that can be diverted from the waste stream at end of life and
returned to raw materials using available processes.
• Reusable packaging: packaging designed for reuse.
• Rigid Plastic Packaging Container (RPPC): a container that meets all the following criteria
1. Made entirely of plastic (except for caps, lids and labels).
2. Contains at least 8 fluid ounces (237 milliliters) but not more than 5 gallons (19 liters).
3. Capable of maintaining shape while holding a product.
4. Capable of multiple re-closures with an attached or unattached cap or lid.
5. Normally used to store a product for at least 7 days.
• Secondary packaging: packaging that contains the primary package (e.g., a carton containing
boxes of transparencies).
• Spare: any part made available to resolve unscheduled replacement of like parts in existing
equipment.
• Supply: item consumed by the product during normal operation. Examples include, but are not
limited to, toner, ink, paper, drum cartridge, print cartridge, fuser, developer, and photoreceptor.
Also called Consumable.
• Tertiary packaging: contains or holds primary and/or secondary packages primarily for
transport purposes (e.g., shrink wrap, pallet, banding).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-4
3. Requirements (Mandatory)
1. Reduce. Reduce packaging weight and volume to the minimal levels necessary to achieve the
purpose of the package. Eliminate single use plastics wherever practical.
2. Reuse. Where technically and economically feasible, utilize reusable packaging.
3. Recycle. Utilize materials that are widely recyclable. Where technically and economically
feasible, use recycled material instead of virgin material. Recycled material from post-
consumer waste is preferred over recycled material from pre-consumer waste.
4. Packaging used to ship Xerox equipment or consumables to an end customer must be in
compliance with EHS1001 applicable substance restrictions and suppliers are required to
submit an EHS1001 declaration. Packaging used to ship component parts to Xerox for
incorporation into equipment or consumables does not require EHS1001 supplier declaration
but must comply with EHS710. In all cases do not use materials that contain prohibited
substances listed in Appendix A.
5. Packaging used to transport hazardous materials must comply with all applicable international,
federal, state and local regulations through which the package will travel. Contact regulatory
agencies directly for detailed requirements. It is beyond the scope of this document to include
these requirements.
Questions regarding shipping hazardous materials in North America and Europe can be
directed to [email protected]
6. Non-Manufactured Wood Packing (NMWP), also called Solid Wood Packaging Material
(SWPM), must meet International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures Publication No. 15
(ISPM-15) and be properly identified on at least two (2) sides. NMWP must also be bark free
when shipped into Australia. Compliance with ISPM-15 must be based on heat treatment (HT)
only. Methyl bromide (MB) fumigation is prohibited.
7. Identify packaging materials according to Appendix B.
8. Weights and types of packaging materials for machines, options and consumables must be
reported to Xerox. Field Replacement Unit / spare parts are exempted from this requirement.
Information required includes the following:
• Total weight of primary packaging by material type (g)
• Material type classifications: Paper, Plastic, Wood, Aluminum, Ferrous Metals, Other
Metals, Glass, and Other
Xerox needs accurate primary packaging information in order to annually calculate the total
weight and type of primary, secondary, and tertiary packaging placed on the market. This
information is required for compliance with packaging regulations, such as the EU Packaging
Directive.
Suppliers of items in scope of the requirements listed above, must complete, and submit
information for primary packaging via the attached template to [email protected]
https://www.xerox.com/downloads/usa/en/e/supplier_packaging_template_EHS710.xls
9. Suppliers shall upon request provide Xerox with the approximate recycled content (by weight
or volume) for packaging of machines, options and consumables/supplies. Exempted from this
requirement are FRUs and spare parts.
10. EH&S Labeling requirements for Xerox® products, parts and materials, including primary
packaging must be identified per Appendix C.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-5
11. Plastic bags or sheets that meet the following criteria must be marked with the suffocation
warning symbol shown below. This requirement does not apply to stretch or shrink wrap.
Desired size of symbol is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches). Reduce appropriately to fit a smaller
item.
Contact Xerox at [email protected] for an electronic file of this symbol.
• Bags: 1 mil thick or less (0.025 mm, 0.001 inches) and 305 mm (12 inches) or greater
circumference opening.
• Sheets: 1mil thick or less (o.025 mm, 0.001 inches) and 232 cm2 (36 in2).
12. Dissimilar packaging materials must be separable without the use of tools (e.g., foam must not
be permanently adhered to any other type of packaging material). Exceptions include:
• Plastic bags (or wrap) affixed with paper labels that meet either of the following criteria:
a. Combined weight of single bag (or wrap) and label is less than 25 grams.
b. Surface area of label is less than 50cm2.
• Pallets or pallet assemblies that are part of the primary package
• Tape, glue or staples used to construct or close a fiber-based container.
• Multi-layer bags (e.g., metalized or static shielding bags).
Note: This is a requirement for machines, options and consumables/supplies and a best
practice for FRU/spares and incoming materials to Xerox manufacturing facilities.
13. Elemental chlorine must not be used as a bleaching agent to bleach virgin or recovered
content fibers in packaging.
14. Paperboard, corrugated fiberboard, solid fiberboard and spiral wound tubes must meet or
exceed the minimum total recovered fiber content specified in the table below. Post-consumer
recovered content is preferred over pre-consumer recovered content.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-6
Minimum Total Recovered Fiber Content
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered Fiber
Content1
Paperboard Boxboard
Chipboard
Barrierboard
Cartonboard
80%
Corrugated fiberboard2 Containerboard
Linerboard
Corrugated medium
50%
Solid fiberboard 40%
Spiral wound tubes Comprised of paper only 90%
1 calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average.
2 required content based on weighted average (by weight) of all components in packaging part (e.g. liners and mediums in
corrugated).
15. Starting in 2022, newly supplied plastic or re-designed packaging must meet or exceed
minimum recovered content as specified in the table below. Post-consumer recovered content
is preferable over pre-consumer content, but both pre- and post-consumer may be added
together to meet minimum recovered content requirements.
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered
Content1
Plastic bags Equipment dust covers
Documentation consolidation bags
30%
Plastic trays and inserts Plastic trays or parts cradles 30%
Foamed plastics Foam LDPE end caps/blocks
Expanded PS end caps/blocks
30%
TBD%
Mixed material plastics Anti-static bags TBD%
16. Suppliers must provide Xerox with “supplier letters” to verify compliance to certain
requirements. Supplier letters can be found in Appendix D and Appendix E.
One letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple packaging components (e.g,. an entire
product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e. all corrugated, all EPS foam, etc.).
• Elimination of intentionally added toxic constituents in packaging. Sample letter can be
found in Appendix D.
• Recovered content in select packaging materials. Sample letter can be found in Appendix
E.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 4-7
4. Best Practices (Preferred)
• Where possible, at least 90% of overall unit packaging (by weight) shall consist of materials that
are compostable, fiber-based, or commonly recyclable.
• Use Kraft or unbleached paper materials whenever possible.
• Use molded pulp, corrugated or boxboard packaging materials in place of plastic packaging
whenever possible.
• Do not use coatings or adhesives that prevent recycling.
• Avoid using polyurethane foam.
• Avoid using pre-molded polyurethane and/or foam-in-place.
• Avoid using commingled plastics and copolymers. Only use if there is an established recycling
process that can be utilized in all applicable markets. Rubberized versions of Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) are acceptable if they can be recycled as a monomer material (e.g., brand
names RMER, NEPS).
• Rigid Plastic Packaging Container (RPPC) shall be composed of at least 25 percent post-
consumer resin.
• Single use plastics should be avoided.
• Where there is no feasible alternative, approval of single use plastic must be obtained from the
Xerox Packaging Engineering Manager prior to use. Example of single use plastics are dust
sheets, bags, and foam packaging which protect the product during transportation.
• All plastics used must be recyclable.
• All plastic packaging should contain the highest percentage practical of recycled plastic content,
aiming for a minimum of 30% recycled content (pre- and/or post-consumer).
• Plastic packaging that cannot meet the minimum recycled content requirements should be
prioritized for redesign.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-8
5. Appendices
Appendix A: Harmonized Prohibited Substance List
Packaging used to ship Xerox equipment or consumables to an end customer must be in
compliance with applicable packaging substance restrictions, for example those covered under the
REACH Regulation, and the EU packaging Directive. Suppliers are required to submit an
EHS1001 declaration confirming product compliance.
Packaging used to ship component parts to Xerox for incorporation into equipment or consumables
does not require EHS1001 supplier declaration but must comply with EHS710.
Xerox Standard EHS1001 - Environment, Health and Safety Supplier Requirements: Chemical
Bans/Restrictions and Part Marking, provides information on restrictions and can be found here:
http://www.xerox.com/downloads/dl/usa/en/f/FILE_EHSA_XRX_INFO_REQUIREMENTS_1001.pdf
EHS1001 Compliance Forms can be found here:
https://www.xerox.com/downloads/usa/en/e/EHS_1001_Compliance_Forms.xls
Completed forms must be submitted to: [email protected]
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-9
Appendix B: Material Identification
These requirements are based on regulations from the European Union, China, Japan and Korea. Their intent is to facilitate recycling by identifying the material of each packaging component.
1. Every component requires a material identification mark per component. The mark must be legible.
2. All packaging components for products, options and consumables must be identified as indicated in the table below. Stretch wrap, shrink film, banding, tape, desiccant, and pallets do not require identification. FRUs and spares are regarded as best practice
3. The outermost unit package should also contain a QR code to scale with other packaging marking (artwork shown below) that links to additional general and country-specific packaging sorting and disposal instructions.
General Requirements
• Minimum size should be 20 x 20 mm. Marking can be proportionately reduced below this size to
accommodate smaller packaging components if it is still legible.
• For products launched after 1 January 2016, if space and cost permit, use both Option A and
Option B resin codes for high density polyethylene and low-density polyethylene. If cost and
space do not permit the use of both Option A and Option B resin codes, use only Option B.
Plastic
Type Code #
Polyester PET 01
PET
Option A
(HDPE)
Option B
(PE-HD)
High density
polyethylene
HDPE and
PE-HD
02
HDPE
PE-HD
Polyvinyl chloride PVC 03
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-10
Low density
polyethylene
LDPE and
PE-LD
04 Option A
(LDPE)
Option B
(PE-LD)
Polypropylene PP 05
LDPE
PE-LD
Polystyrene PS 06
Other plastic Other 07
Paper
Not required for packaging components with a surface area smaller than 200 mm2
Outermost cardboard boxes must be marked with QR code as specified.
• If sufficient space is available on outer cardboard box, include QR code, PAP20 marking,
cardboard box recyclable symbol and mobius loop symbol.
• If space is limited, include QR code + PAP20 + cardboard box symbol
• If space is extremely limited, include QR code + PAP20
Interior cardboard components larger than 200 mm2 must be marked at a minimum with material
ID code (e.g. PAP20).
Type Code # Required Optional
Corrugated
Cardboard
(including molded
pulp packaging)
Outer box only:
PAP 20
Non-corrugated
fiberboard
PAP 21
Paper PAP 22
Metal, Glass and Wood
Not required for packaging components with a surface area smaller than 5 x 103 mm2 (5000 mm2)
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-11
Type Code # Required
Steel FE 40
Aluminum ALU 41
Natural wood (including
boxes and pallets)
FOR 50
Glass – clear (colorless) GL 70
Glass – green GL 71
Glass – brown GL 72
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-12
Composite Materials
Type Code # SAMPLE
Plastic/aluminum
No code
90
Plastic/tin 91
Plastic/mixed metal 92
Plastic/glass 95
Glass/aluminum 96
Glass/tin 97
Glass/mixed metals 98
Paper or fiberboard/mixed metals 80
Paper or fiberboard/plastic 81
Paper or fiberboard/aluminum 82
Paper or fiberboard/tin 83
Paper or fiberboard/plastic/aluminum 84
Paper or fiberboard/plastic/aluminum/tin 85
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-13
Requirements for Korea
The appropriate Korean recycle symbol shown below must be placed on all packaging components
– foam cushions, plastic film, thermoform plastics, sheets, and bags.
The symbol can be molded into or printed directly on the packaging part or printed onto a label that
is applied to the part. It is recommended that the label be of the same material as the part to which
it is being applied.
Design detail information
1. The triangular recycling symbol (excluding the “material name” text below it) must be at least 8
mm in width and length. The triangular recycling symbol and the material composition must be at
least 11 mm in length. See design detail information for further details regarding size of symbol
and code.
2. The material type name inside the symbol must be written in Korean. The material composition
name below the symbol must be written in English.
3. The extension of each side of the symbol is a regular triangle, whose inside angle is 60 degrees
and outside angle at the bended part of the arrow’s end is 120 degrees.
4. The label is to be located on the front or side flank or around the barcode of the component
unless it is impossible; in which case the mark could be located on the bottom or lid of the
package.
Exemptions
The following packaging materials are exempt from the marking requirement:
• Toner containers and CRUs
• Packaging for spares/FRUs
• Unprinted films, sheets, and bags
• Packaging materials whose surface is less than 50 cm2 (7.75 in2)
• Plastic sheet and film with a surface area less than 100 cm2 (15.5 in2). Plastic bags are included
in the scope of plastic sheet and film. Bag example: A 6 cm wide x 10 cm tall bag that uses 120
cm2 plastic film, exceeding the >100 cm2 limit, must be marked unless otherwise exempt.
• Plastic film or sheet packaging materials with thickness less than 20 microns.
Plastic foam cushion
Plastic foam and buffer packaging must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: foam
cushion)
Code changes
according to material
type
High density
polyethylene
HDPE
Low density
polyethylene
LDPE
Polypropylene PP
Polystyrene PS
Polyvinyl chloride PVC
Other plastic Other
A:Minimum size 8mm,
B:Minimum size 11mm
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-14
Film sheet
Film sheet packaging, including aluminum bags, must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: Film sheet)
Code changes
according to material
type
High density polyethylene HDPE
Low density polyethylene LDPE
Polypropylene PP
Polystyrene PS
Polyvinyl chloride PVC
Other plastic Other
Polyester (PET)
PET packaging must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: PET) Polyester PET
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-15
Appendix C: EH&S Labeling Requirements
For Xerox® products, parts, and materials, including primary packaging
Product marking requirements are covered in EH&S-1001.Note to Supplier: Artwork containing these
requirements is typically provided by Xerox in the form of an Adobe Illustrator file. Contact Xerox Group
program manager if artwork has not been provided.
Key:
✓ Required
NR Not presently required by current EH&S regulatory regulations
Packaging Contents
L a b
e l G
ra p
h ic
s a
n d
S y m
b o
ls
Waste Contain er. Ink & Toner
Toner, developer replenisher, or cartridge & primary pkg.)
Toner, developer or replenisher bottle
Solid Inks
Water- based liquid inks
Solvent- based liquid inks
Photo- receptor
Service materials/ supplies (primary & sec. pkg.)
Equip. parts (printers, copiers kits and options)
Chemical Comp. of packaging (e.g., SPI code)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ingredients of product (e.g., CAS#)
NR NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Health Hazard Warning
✓ #5 NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Physical Hazard Warning
NR #1 NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Agency Approval
NR #6 NR #6 NR #6 NR NR NR NR NR #6
Product Identifier (e.g., part#)
✓#4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓#4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4
Green World Alliance
#2 #2 #2 NR #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
Haz. Material Shipping Info.
NR NR NR NR NR ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Voluntary Ecolabel
NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR ✓ #3
Comments: 1. For products distributed in Asia/Pacific market, include warning “DO NOT INCINERATE”. 2. Use if return system has been established. 3. Applies if ecolabel certification has been achieved, and required by the scheme e.g., Energy Star 4. Both primary and secondary packaging shall include Xerox name, product name and part number. Refer to MN2-155.2
and Xerox Packaging Graphic Standards for details. 5. Language may vary by country, symbols, graphics, will remain the same All information to be obtained from and
reviewed by materials safety and compliance. 6. Consult with Xerox Product Safety Engineering for unique applications. Examples include CE and some in-country
certifications (EAC, Ukraine, NOM, etc.).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-16
Appendix D: Supplier Letter
Completed forms should be returned to [email protected]
Supplier Letter to Verify Elimination of Intentionally Added Toxic Constituents in Packaging
The purpose of this letter is to verify compliance to the following requirement for the packaging
components listed in this letter. Note that one letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple
packaging components (i.e.an entire product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e., all
corrugated, all EPS foam, etc.).
Product:
Packaging component (list all):
We certify that packaging components provided to Xerox comply with the following:
Cadmium/Cadmium Compounds, Hexavalent Chromium and its Compounds, Lead/Led
Compounds and Mercury/Mercury Compounds shall not be intentionally added to any package or
packaging component. For incidental presence, the sum of the concentration of lead, cadmium,
mercury, and hexavalent chromium resent in any packaging component shall not exceed 100 ppm
by weight, except for packaging components that qualify for the recycled content exemption.
“Recycled content exemption” is specified in the Model Toxics in Packaging Legislation as the
following:
Packaging components that would not exceed the maximum contaminant levels, i.e., the sum of
the concentration levels of lead, cadmium, mercury and hexavalent chromium present in any
packaging component shall not exceed 100 parts per million by weight but for the addition of
recycled materials; and provided that none of the four regulated metals in the packaging
components has been recovered and/or separated from other materials for use as a metal or
metallic compound; and provided that the packaging components do not exceed a maximum
concentration limit of 200 ppm by weight for the sum of the four regulated metals.
Furthermore, packaging inks are certified not to contain mineral oils.
Supplier Name:
Authorized by:
Print name Print title
Signature Date
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-17
Appendix E: Supplier Letter
Completed forms should be returned to [email protected]
Supplier Letter to Verify Recovered Content in Select Packaging Materials
The purpose of this letter is to verify compliance to the following requirement for the packaging
components listed in this letter. One letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple packaging
components (i.e.an entire product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e., all corrugated, all EPS
foam, etc.).
Product:
Packaging component (list all):
We certify that packaging components provided to Xerox comply with the following:
Paperboard, corrugated fiberboard, solid fiberboard, and spiral wound tubes shall meet or exceed
the minimum total recovered fiber content specified in the table below. Post-consumer recovered
content is preferred over pre-consumer recovered content.
Newly offered or redesigned plastic packaging supplied after January 2022 shall meet or exceed
the minimum recycled plastic content specified in the table below. While post-consumer is
preferred over pre-consumer recycled content, both can be included in the recycled content
calculation.
Minimum Total Recovered Fiber Content
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered Fiber Content1
Paperboard Boxboard
Chipboard
Barrierboard
Cartonboard
80%
Corrugated Fiberboard2 Containerboard
Linerboard
Corrugated Medium
50%
Solid fiberboard 40%
Spiral Wound Tubes Comprised of paper only 90%
1 Calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average. 2 Required content based on weighted average (by weight) of all components in packaging part (e.g., liners and mediums in
corrugated).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-18
Minimum Plastic Recycled Content for NEWLY DESIGNED and RE-DESIGNED plastic
packaging starting Jan 2022
Category Comments/Examples Recycled Content3
Plastic bags Equipment dust covers
Documentation consolidation bags
30%
Plastic trays and inserts Plastic trays or parts cradles 30%
Foamed plastics Foam LDPE end caps/blocks
Expanded PS end caps/blocks
30%
TBD
Mixed material plastic packaging Anti-static bags TBD
3 Calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average. Includes pre-
consumer and/or post-consumer recycled plastic.
Supplier Name:
Authorized by:
Print name Print title
Signature Date
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-19
6. Revision History
Rev Date Changes
OR 05Aug02 • Original release – Harmonized
B 10Aug07 • Major revision adding China RoHS, Japan EcoMark and Korean marking
requirements.
C 26Oct07 • Amend requirement 3.5 to include the statement: “Compliance with ISPM-15
shall be based on heat treatment (HT) only. Methyl bromide (MB) fumigation
is prohibited to support Xerox applications.”
• Removed “Green Dot” from Appendix C
D 16Dec08 • Section 2: New terms defined
• Requirement 3.6 added requiring conformance with formaldehyde emission
limits specified in 93120-93120.12, Title 17 of the California Code of
Regulations.
• Requirements 3.8 and 3.10 to packaging of machines, options and
consumables/supplies.
• Requirement 3.14 added: All non-reusable packaging shall be separable.
Moved from best practice to a requirement for machines, options and
consumables/supplies. Remained a best practice for FRU/spares and
incoming materials to Xerox manufacturing facilities.
• Best practice 4.6. added to the list
• Appendix A: Addition of “Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) only permitted in parts used
for ensuring safety (i.e., electrical cable, tube, tape, sleeve and battery, fuse
breaker, electrolytic capacitor, switch, terminal block).”
• Appendix A: (Asia Pacific Prohibited Substances): Removal of substances
prohibited before the date of this Standard.
• Appendix B: Limited requirements to packaging of machines, options,
consumables/supplies and FRU/spares (i.e., excluded requirement for stretch
wrap, shrink film, banding, tape, desiccant and pallets).
• Appendix B: Added symbol for natural wood that had been mistakenly deleted
last version.
• Appendix B: The symbol for corrugated fiberboard is not marked as “optional”
(i.e., Mobius loop is mandatory).
• Appendix B: (Paper) Added “Not required for packaging with a surface area
smaller than 200 mm2”.
• Appendix B: (Metal, Glass, Wood) Added “Not required for packaging
components with a surface area smaller than 5x103 mm2”.
• Appendix B: (Marking Requirements for Korea) revised to state: “Note: This
requirement does not apply to the packaging of consumables, spare parts and
options. It only applies to the foam cushions on products including printers,
scanners and copiers.”
• Appendix B: Removed requirements for Japan
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-20
• Appendix D: Added U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
recommended recovered fiber content for paperboard and packaging
components.
E 21Mar09 • Added Appendix E, Substances of Very High Concern as listed in the
European Union Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH) Directive
• Appendix A updated to include Perfluorooctane sulfonate (PF)S) and remove
PBDO.
F 23Mar09 • Removed requirement: “Composite wood products, including packaging
materials made from hardwood plywood, particle board and medium density
fiberboard must comply with the formaldehyde emission limits specified in
93120-93120.12, title 17, California Code of Regulations. A label, in
conformance with the regulation, is to be applied to every finished good
produced or to every box containing finished goods. Any additional
documentation required for compliance, including exemptions for sell-through
provisions, is to be provided upon request.”
G 17Jul09 • Updated Appendix A (Prohibited Substance list) to include dimethylfumarate
(DMF) and cobalt dichloride.
H 04Jan12 • Changed internet link to standard (www.xerox.com)
• Minor changes for clarification.
• Revised 3.11 for clarity
• Revised to comply with EPEAT as follows:
- Revised section 3.12 to be consistent with exact language in EPEAT.
- Added sections 3.14, 3.15, 3.16 and Appendix E.
- Removed section <6.6> and Appendix D.
• Deleted Appendix containing REACH list and replaced with link to European
Chemicals Agency (ECHA) in section 3.13.
• Revised Appendix B to comply with latest Korean requirements.
J 13Oct15 • Revised Appendix B to comply with revised plastic packaging HDPE and
LDPE marking requirements for China.
• Revised Appendix B to comply with latest Korean requirements.
K 02Nov18 • Contact address updated to [email protected] from
• Changed internet link to: https://www.xerox.com/en-us/about/supplier-
relations/packaging-standards
• Added Xerox footnote and revision details to standard
L 10Jun19 • Section 3 - Information on completion of EHS1001 added to requirements
section
• Appendix A – now provide direct links to EHS1001 standard and forms where
all substance restrictions are listed and actively maintained
• Appendix A – Additional detail added to halogen containing polymers
restriction, identifying source of requirement
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-21
• Section 3 - Revised language regarding weight and type of packaging to be
provided to Xerox.
• Section 3 - Added new reporting template to mandatory requirements
• Appendix C – EHS Labeling Requirements table revised and updated
• Appendix D and E have been revised to show completed documents must be
returned to Tori Deyoung.
• Review completed of all referenced standards and measures contained in the
standard
• Removed the following requirement - “The following are prohibited only for
products that will be distributed in Asia-Pacific market areas: Brominated
Flame Retardants (BFR) in addition to PBB and PBDE”
M 31Mar20 • Section 2: Additional examples of non-packaging and tertiary packaging
provided in the definitions section
• Section 4: Information provided on single use plastics and the approval for
use
• Section 5: Appendix A – Removal of the halogen containing polymers
requirement (Blue Angel) as this has now been added to the substance
restriction standard -EHS1001
N 09Oct20 All sections – updated to latest branding requirements
O 04Jan22 • Definition of mineral oils and prohibition of mineral oils in packaging inks
• Marking requirements aligned with EU 129/97/EC - Identification system
(alphanumeric code) for packaging material pursuant to 94/62/EC
• New requirement for a QR code on all NEW/RE-DESIGNED corrugated
packaging after Jan 2022
• Updated recovered material content requirements for corrugated from 25% to
50%.
• Added minimum recycled content requirements for plastic packaging
• Added plastics recycled content requirements for NEWLY SUPPLIED and
RE-DESIGNED plastic packaging AFTER Jan 2022 to supplier certification
letter template.
P 20Jan22 • Modified QR code requirements to include additional translated languages
(PFIGS+Dutch+English)
• Clarified required & optional cardboard box markings in the event of limited
space
• Added “Furthermore, packaging inks are certified not to contain mineral oils”
to supplier certification letter
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern Dear Sir / Madam, This Letter serves to confirm the following:
The Xerox Versalink C7130 model and Xerox Altalink C8155 has no toxic substances used in packaging material, including heavy metals.
As well all plastic materials used for packaging do not contain halogen-containing polymers (such as PVC) Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
EHS-710
Environment, Health & Safety Requirements for
Packaging
Rev- P
Requirements for Packaging
© 2022 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox® and Xerox and Design® are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. BR25673
Other company trademarks are also acknowledged.
Document Version: Revision P (January 2022).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging i
Preface
• Questions regarding requirements contained in this standard should be directed to:
• This document is available on the internet at:
https://www.xerox.com/en-us/about/supplier-relations/packaging-standards
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging ii
Contents
1. EHS-710 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Scope .............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Objective ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
2. Definitions ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
3. Requirements (Mandatory) .......................................................................................................... 3-4
4. Best Practices (Preferred) ............................................................................................................ 4-7
5. Appendices .................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Appendix A: Harmonized Prohibited Substance List ...................................................................... 5-8
Appendix B: Material Identification .................................................................................................. 5-9
Appendix C: EH&S Labeling Guidelines ....................................................................................... 5-15
Appendix D: Supplier Letter .......................................................................................................... 5-16
Appendix E: Supplier Letter .......................................................................................................... 5-17
6. Revision History .......................................................................................................................... 6-19
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 1-1
1. EHS-710 Overview
Summary
This standard specifies the minimum environment, health, and safety requirements for packaging
of products, parts or materials shipped to any manufacturing site, distribution center or customer
from suppliers or other Xerox locations.
Scope
This standard applies to all Xerox organizations and third-party suppliers.
Objective
Comply with all applicable regulations, satisfy customer requirements, and achieve corporate waste
minimization goals. Any packaging that complies with this standard will be marked indicating its
material composition as reflected in Appendix B of this Standard and will be capable of being
recycled.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 2-2
2. Definitions
• Commingled plastic: a mixture of different plastics.
• Consumable: item consumed by the product during normal operation. Examples include, but
are not limited to, toner, ink, paper, drum cartridge, print cartridge, fuser, and developer and
photoreceptor. Also called Supply.
• Copolymer: a polymer consisting of two or more different monomers.
• Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU): customer installable item that requires scheduled
replacement. This is considered a consumable.
• Environmental claim: a statement, symbol or graphic that indicates an environmental aspect of
a product, component, or package.
• Field Replacement Unit (FRU): any assembly made available to support unscheduled
replacement of like parts in existing equipment.
• Incoming materials to manufacturing: any material and/or part coming into a manufacturing
facility that becomes assembled or made into a product.
• Manufactured wood packaging material: wood-based materials such as plywood, particle
board, oriented strand board, veneer and wood wool that have been created using glue, heat
and pressure.
• Machine: a product that performs a function on its own without the need of additional items.
Examples include, but are not limited to, printer or image output terminal (IOT), scanner or image
input terminal (IIT) and multifunction product (MFP).
• Mineral oil: An oil present in mixtures such as printing inks containing substances that disrupt
the recycling of packaging waste or limit the use of recycled material because of the risks these
substances present to human health
• Non-manufactured wood packaging material (NMWP): solid wood (usually softwood
[coniferous]) material that is used in the construction of crates, packing blocks, load boards,
pallet stringers and other material handling devices. Also called solid wood packing material
(SWPM).
• Option: items that are added to machines to provide additional capabilities. Examples include,
but are not limited to, second feeder, finisher, high capacity feeder and cart.
• Packaging: any item that is used to protect, contain and/or transport a product, part or material.
Packaging may be described as primary, secondary, or tertiary. Items that support the contents
throughout their functional lifetime and remain as part of the printer are not packaging (e.g.,
toner cartridges, ink cartridges, CRU’s).
• Pre-consumer waste: material, generated during a manufacturing process, which is diverted
from the waste stream for another use. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework,
regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process
that generated it.
• Primary packaging: the first wrap or containment of a product. Contains the product or material
(e.g., a box holding transparencies, a carton container toner cartridge).
• Post-consumer waste: material generated by consumers or businesses after using a product to
the point that it is no longer usable for its intended purpose. This includes material returned
through the distribution chain.
• Recycled content: proportion, by weight, of recycled material.
• Recycled packaging: packaging reprocessed from recovered material.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 2-3
• Recyclable packaging: packaging that can be diverted from the waste stream at end of life and
returned to raw materials using available processes.
• Reusable packaging: packaging designed for reuse.
• Rigid Plastic Packaging Container (RPPC): a container that meets all the following criteria
1. Made entirely of plastic (except for caps, lids and labels).
2. Contains at least 8 fluid ounces (237 milliliters) but not more than 5 gallons (19 liters).
3. Capable of maintaining shape while holding a product.
4. Capable of multiple re-closures with an attached or unattached cap or lid.
5. Normally used to store a product for at least 7 days.
• Secondary packaging: packaging that contains the primary package (e.g., a carton containing
boxes of transparencies).
• Spare: any part made available to resolve unscheduled replacement of like parts in existing
equipment.
• Supply: item consumed by the product during normal operation. Examples include, but are not
limited to, toner, ink, paper, drum cartridge, print cartridge, fuser, developer, and photoreceptor.
Also called Consumable.
• Tertiary packaging: contains or holds primary and/or secondary packages primarily for
transport purposes (e.g., shrink wrap, pallet, banding).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-4
3. Requirements (Mandatory)
1. Reduce. Reduce packaging weight and volume to the minimal levels necessary to achieve the
purpose of the package. Eliminate single use plastics wherever practical.
2. Reuse. Where technically and economically feasible, utilize reusable packaging.
3. Recycle. Utilize materials that are widely recyclable. Where technically and economically
feasible, use recycled material instead of virgin material. Recycled material from post-
consumer waste is preferred over recycled material from pre-consumer waste.
4. Packaging used to ship Xerox equipment or consumables to an end customer must be in
compliance with EHS1001 applicable substance restrictions and suppliers are required to
submit an EHS1001 declaration. Packaging used to ship component parts to Xerox for
incorporation into equipment or consumables does not require EHS1001 supplier declaration
but must comply with EHS710. In all cases do not use materials that contain prohibited
substances listed in Appendix A.
5. Packaging used to transport hazardous materials must comply with all applicable international,
federal, state and local regulations through which the package will travel. Contact regulatory
agencies directly for detailed requirements. It is beyond the scope of this document to include
these requirements.
Questions regarding shipping hazardous materials in North America and Europe can be
directed to [email protected]
6. Non-Manufactured Wood Packing (NMWP), also called Solid Wood Packaging Material
(SWPM), must meet International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures Publication No. 15
(ISPM-15) and be properly identified on at least two (2) sides. NMWP must also be bark free
when shipped into Australia. Compliance with ISPM-15 must be based on heat treatment (HT)
only. Methyl bromide (MB) fumigation is prohibited.
7. Identify packaging materials according to Appendix B.
8. Weights and types of packaging materials for machines, options and consumables must be
reported to Xerox. Field Replacement Unit / spare parts are exempted from this requirement.
Information required includes the following:
• Total weight of primary packaging by material type (g)
• Material type classifications: Paper, Plastic, Wood, Aluminum, Ferrous Metals, Other
Metals, Glass, and Other
Xerox needs accurate primary packaging information in order to annually calculate the total
weight and type of primary, secondary, and tertiary packaging placed on the market. This
information is required for compliance with packaging regulations, such as the EU Packaging
Directive.
Suppliers of items in scope of the requirements listed above, must complete, and submit
information for primary packaging via the attached template to [email protected]
https://www.xerox.com/downloads/usa/en/e/supplier_packaging_template_EHS710.xls
9. Suppliers shall upon request provide Xerox with the approximate recycled content (by weight
or volume) for packaging of machines, options and consumables/supplies. Exempted from this
requirement are FRUs and spare parts.
10. EH&S Labeling requirements for Xerox® products, parts and materials, including primary
packaging must be identified per Appendix C.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-5
11. Plastic bags or sheets that meet the following criteria must be marked with the suffocation
warning symbol shown below. This requirement does not apply to stretch or shrink wrap.
Desired size of symbol is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches). Reduce appropriately to fit a smaller
item.
Contact Xerox at [email protected] for an electronic file of this symbol.
• Bags: 1 mil thick or less (0.025 mm, 0.001 inches) and 305 mm (12 inches) or greater
circumference opening.
• Sheets: 1mil thick or less (o.025 mm, 0.001 inches) and 232 cm2 (36 in2).
12. Dissimilar packaging materials must be separable without the use of tools (e.g., foam must not
be permanently adhered to any other type of packaging material). Exceptions include:
• Plastic bags (or wrap) affixed with paper labels that meet either of the following criteria:
a. Combined weight of single bag (or wrap) and label is less than 25 grams.
b. Surface area of label is less than 50cm2.
• Pallets or pallet assemblies that are part of the primary package
• Tape, glue or staples used to construct or close a fiber-based container.
• Multi-layer bags (e.g., metalized or static shielding bags).
Note: This is a requirement for machines, options and consumables/supplies and a best
practice for FRU/spares and incoming materials to Xerox manufacturing facilities.
13. Elemental chlorine must not be used as a bleaching agent to bleach virgin or recovered
content fibers in packaging.
14. Paperboard, corrugated fiberboard, solid fiberboard and spiral wound tubes must meet or
exceed the minimum total recovered fiber content specified in the table below. Post-consumer
recovered content is preferred over pre-consumer recovered content.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 3-6
Minimum Total Recovered Fiber Content
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered Fiber
Content1
Paperboard Boxboard
Chipboard
Barrierboard
Cartonboard
80%
Corrugated fiberboard2 Containerboard
Linerboard
Corrugated medium
50%
Solid fiberboard 40%
Spiral wound tubes Comprised of paper only 90%
1 calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average.
2 required content based on weighted average (by weight) of all components in packaging part (e.g. liners and mediums in
corrugated).
15. Starting in 2022, newly supplied plastic or re-designed packaging must meet or exceed
minimum recovered content as specified in the table below. Post-consumer recovered content
is preferable over pre-consumer content, but both pre- and post-consumer may be added
together to meet minimum recovered content requirements.
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered
Content1
Plastic bags Equipment dust covers
Documentation consolidation bags
30%
Plastic trays and inserts Plastic trays or parts cradles 30%
Foamed plastics Foam LDPE end caps/blocks
Expanded PS end caps/blocks
30%
TBD%
Mixed material plastics Anti-static bags TBD%
16. Suppliers must provide Xerox with “supplier letters” to verify compliance to certain
requirements. Supplier letters can be found in Appendix D and Appendix E.
One letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple packaging components (e.g,. an entire
product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e. all corrugated, all EPS foam, etc.).
• Elimination of intentionally added toxic constituents in packaging. Sample letter can be
found in Appendix D.
• Recovered content in select packaging materials. Sample letter can be found in Appendix
E.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 4-7
4. Best Practices (Preferred)
• Where possible, at least 90% of overall unit packaging (by weight) shall consist of materials that
are compostable, fiber-based, or commonly recyclable.
• Use Kraft or unbleached paper materials whenever possible.
• Use molded pulp, corrugated or boxboard packaging materials in place of plastic packaging
whenever possible.
• Do not use coatings or adhesives that prevent recycling.
• Avoid using polyurethane foam.
• Avoid using pre-molded polyurethane and/or foam-in-place.
• Avoid using commingled plastics and copolymers. Only use if there is an established recycling
process that can be utilized in all applicable markets. Rubberized versions of Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) are acceptable if they can be recycled as a monomer material (e.g., brand
names RMER, NEPS).
• Rigid Plastic Packaging Container (RPPC) shall be composed of at least 25 percent post-
consumer resin.
• Single use plastics should be avoided.
• Where there is no feasible alternative, approval of single use plastic must be obtained from the
Xerox Packaging Engineering Manager prior to use. Example of single use plastics are dust
sheets, bags, and foam packaging which protect the product during transportation.
• All plastics used must be recyclable.
• All plastic packaging should contain the highest percentage practical of recycled plastic content,
aiming for a minimum of 30% recycled content (pre- and/or post-consumer).
• Plastic packaging that cannot meet the minimum recycled content requirements should be
prioritized for redesign.
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-8
5. Appendices
Appendix A: Harmonized Prohibited Substance List
Packaging used to ship Xerox equipment or consumables to an end customer must be in
compliance with applicable packaging substance restrictions, for example those covered under the
REACH Regulation, and the EU packaging Directive. Suppliers are required to submit an
EHS1001 declaration confirming product compliance.
Packaging used to ship component parts to Xerox for incorporation into equipment or consumables
does not require EHS1001 supplier declaration but must comply with EHS710.
Xerox Standard EHS1001 - Environment, Health and Safety Supplier Requirements: Chemical
Bans/Restrictions and Part Marking, provides information on restrictions and can be found here:
http://www.xerox.com/downloads/dl/usa/en/f/FILE_EHSA_XRX_INFO_REQUIREMENTS_1001.pdf
EHS1001 Compliance Forms can be found here:
https://www.xerox.com/downloads/usa/en/e/EHS_1001_Compliance_Forms.xls
Completed forms must be submitted to: [email protected]
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-9
Appendix B: Material Identification
These requirements are based on regulations from the European Union, China, Japan and Korea. Their intent is to facilitate recycling by identifying the material of each packaging component.
1. Every component requires a material identification mark per component. The mark must be legible.
2. All packaging components for products, options and consumables must be identified as indicated in the table below. Stretch wrap, shrink film, banding, tape, desiccant, and pallets do not require identification. FRUs and spares are regarded as best practice
3. The outermost unit package should also contain a QR code to scale with other packaging marking (artwork shown below) that links to additional general and country-specific packaging sorting and disposal instructions.
General Requirements
• Minimum size should be 20 x 20 mm. Marking can be proportionately reduced below this size to
accommodate smaller packaging components if it is still legible.
• For products launched after 1 January 2016, if space and cost permit, use both Option A and
Option B resin codes for high density polyethylene and low-density polyethylene. If cost and
space do not permit the use of both Option A and Option B resin codes, use only Option B.
Plastic
Type Code #
Polyester PET 01
PET
Option A
(HDPE)
Option B
(PE-HD)
High density
polyethylene
HDPE and
PE-HD
02
HDPE
PE-HD
Polyvinyl chloride PVC 03
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-10
Low density
polyethylene
LDPE and
PE-LD
04 Option A
(LDPE)
Option B
(PE-LD)
Polypropylene PP 05
LDPE
PE-LD
Polystyrene PS 06
Other plastic Other 07
Paper
Not required for packaging components with a surface area smaller than 200 mm2
Outermost cardboard boxes must be marked with QR code as specified.
• If sufficient space is available on outer cardboard box, include QR code, PAP20 marking,
cardboard box recyclable symbol and mobius loop symbol.
• If space is limited, include QR code + PAP20 + cardboard box symbol
• If space is extremely limited, include QR code + PAP20
Interior cardboard components larger than 200 mm2 must be marked at a minimum with material
ID code (e.g. PAP20).
Type Code # Required Optional
Corrugated
Cardboard
(including molded
pulp packaging)
Outer box only:
PAP 20
Non-corrugated
fiberboard
PAP 21
Paper PAP 22
Metal, Glass and Wood
Not required for packaging components with a surface area smaller than 5 x 103 mm2 (5000 mm2)
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-11
Type Code # Required
Steel FE 40
Aluminum ALU 41
Natural wood (including
boxes and pallets)
FOR 50
Glass – clear (colorless) GL 70
Glass – green GL 71
Glass – brown GL 72
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-12
Composite Materials
Type Code # SAMPLE
Plastic/aluminum
No code
90
Plastic/tin 91
Plastic/mixed metal 92
Plastic/glass 95
Glass/aluminum 96
Glass/tin 97
Glass/mixed metals 98
Paper or fiberboard/mixed metals 80
Paper or fiberboard/plastic 81
Paper or fiberboard/aluminum 82
Paper or fiberboard/tin 83
Paper or fiberboard/plastic/aluminum 84
Paper or fiberboard/plastic/aluminum/tin 85
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-13
Requirements for Korea
The appropriate Korean recycle symbol shown below must be placed on all packaging components
– foam cushions, plastic film, thermoform plastics, sheets, and bags.
The symbol can be molded into or printed directly on the packaging part or printed onto a label that
is applied to the part. It is recommended that the label be of the same material as the part to which
it is being applied.
Design detail information
1. The triangular recycling symbol (excluding the “material name” text below it) must be at least 8
mm in width and length. The triangular recycling symbol and the material composition must be at
least 11 mm in length. See design detail information for further details regarding size of symbol
and code.
2. The material type name inside the symbol must be written in Korean. The material composition
name below the symbol must be written in English.
3. The extension of each side of the symbol is a regular triangle, whose inside angle is 60 degrees
and outside angle at the bended part of the arrow’s end is 120 degrees.
4. The label is to be located on the front or side flank or around the barcode of the component
unless it is impossible; in which case the mark could be located on the bottom or lid of the
package.
Exemptions
The following packaging materials are exempt from the marking requirement:
• Toner containers and CRUs
• Packaging for spares/FRUs
• Unprinted films, sheets, and bags
• Packaging materials whose surface is less than 50 cm2 (7.75 in2)
• Plastic sheet and film with a surface area less than 100 cm2 (15.5 in2). Plastic bags are included
in the scope of plastic sheet and film. Bag example: A 6 cm wide x 10 cm tall bag that uses 120
cm2 plastic film, exceeding the >100 cm2 limit, must be marked unless otherwise exempt.
• Plastic film or sheet packaging materials with thickness less than 20 microns.
Plastic foam cushion
Plastic foam and buffer packaging must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: foam
cushion)
Code changes
according to material
type
High density
polyethylene
HDPE
Low density
polyethylene
LDPE
Polypropylene PP
Polystyrene PS
Polyvinyl chloride PVC
Other plastic Other
A:Minimum size 8mm,
B:Minimum size 11mm
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-14
Film sheet
Film sheet packaging, including aluminum bags, must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: Film sheet)
Code changes
according to material
type
High density polyethylene HDPE
Low density polyethylene LDPE
Polypropylene PP
Polystyrene PS
Polyvinyl chloride PVC
Other plastic Other
Polyester (PET)
PET packaging must use the following marks
Type Code
Text does not change
(Meaning: PET) Polyester PET
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-15
Appendix C: EH&S Labeling Requirements
For Xerox® products, parts, and materials, including primary packaging
Product marking requirements are covered in EH&S-1001.Note to Supplier: Artwork containing these
requirements is typically provided by Xerox in the form of an Adobe Illustrator file. Contact Xerox Group
program manager if artwork has not been provided.
Key:
✓ Required
NR Not presently required by current EH&S regulatory regulations
Packaging Contents
L a b
e l G
ra p
h ic
s a
n d
S y m
b o
ls
Waste Contain er. Ink & Toner
Toner, developer replenisher, or cartridge & primary pkg.)
Toner, developer or replenisher bottle
Solid Inks
Water- based liquid inks
Solvent- based liquid inks
Photo- receptor
Service materials/ supplies (primary & sec. pkg.)
Equip. parts (printers, copiers kits and options)
Chemical Comp. of packaging (e.g., SPI code)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ingredients of product (e.g., CAS#)
NR NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Health Hazard Warning
✓ #5 NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Physical Hazard Warning
NR #1 NR NR NR ✓ #5 ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Agency Approval
NR #6 NR #6 NR #6 NR NR NR NR NR #6
Product Identifier (e.g., part#)
✓#4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓#4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4 ✓ #4
Green World Alliance
#2 #2 #2 NR #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
Haz. Material Shipping Info.
NR NR NR NR NR ✓ #5 NR ✓ #5 NR
Voluntary Ecolabel
NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR ✓ #3
Comments: 1. For products distributed in Asia/Pacific market, include warning “DO NOT INCINERATE”. 2. Use if return system has been established. 3. Applies if ecolabel certification has been achieved, and required by the scheme e.g., Energy Star 4. Both primary and secondary packaging shall include Xerox name, product name and part number. Refer to MN2-155.2
and Xerox Packaging Graphic Standards for details. 5. Language may vary by country, symbols, graphics, will remain the same All information to be obtained from and
reviewed by materials safety and compliance. 6. Consult with Xerox Product Safety Engineering for unique applications. Examples include CE and some in-country
certifications (EAC, Ukraine, NOM, etc.).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-16
Appendix D: Supplier Letter
Completed forms should be returned to [email protected]
Supplier Letter to Verify Elimination of Intentionally Added Toxic Constituents in Packaging
The purpose of this letter is to verify compliance to the following requirement for the packaging
components listed in this letter. Note that one letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple
packaging components (i.e.an entire product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e., all
corrugated, all EPS foam, etc.).
Product:
Packaging component (list all):
We certify that packaging components provided to Xerox comply with the following:
Cadmium/Cadmium Compounds, Hexavalent Chromium and its Compounds, Lead/Led
Compounds and Mercury/Mercury Compounds shall not be intentionally added to any package or
packaging component. For incidental presence, the sum of the concentration of lead, cadmium,
mercury, and hexavalent chromium resent in any packaging component shall not exceed 100 ppm
by weight, except for packaging components that qualify for the recycled content exemption.
“Recycled content exemption” is specified in the Model Toxics in Packaging Legislation as the
following:
Packaging components that would not exceed the maximum contaminant levels, i.e., the sum of
the concentration levels of lead, cadmium, mercury and hexavalent chromium present in any
packaging component shall not exceed 100 parts per million by weight but for the addition of
recycled materials; and provided that none of the four regulated metals in the packaging
components has been recovered and/or separated from other materials for use as a metal or
metallic compound; and provided that the packaging components do not exceed a maximum
concentration limit of 200 ppm by weight for the sum of the four regulated metals.
Furthermore, packaging inks are certified not to contain mineral oils.
Supplier Name:
Authorized by:
Print name Print title
Signature Date
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-17
Appendix E: Supplier Letter
Completed forms should be returned to [email protected]
Supplier Letter to Verify Recovered Content in Select Packaging Materials
The purpose of this letter is to verify compliance to the following requirement for the packaging
components listed in this letter. One letter can be used to verify compliance for multiple packaging
components (i.e.an entire product family) or all material sold to Xerox (i.e., all corrugated, all EPS
foam, etc.).
Product:
Packaging component (list all):
We certify that packaging components provided to Xerox comply with the following:
Paperboard, corrugated fiberboard, solid fiberboard, and spiral wound tubes shall meet or exceed
the minimum total recovered fiber content specified in the table below. Post-consumer recovered
content is preferred over pre-consumer recovered content.
Newly offered or redesigned plastic packaging supplied after January 2022 shall meet or exceed
the minimum recycled plastic content specified in the table below. While post-consumer is
preferred over pre-consumer recycled content, both can be included in the recycled content
calculation.
Minimum Total Recovered Fiber Content
Category Comments/Examples Total Recovered Fiber Content1
Paperboard Boxboard
Chipboard
Barrierboard
Cartonboard
80%
Corrugated Fiberboard2 Containerboard
Linerboard
Corrugated Medium
50%
Solid fiberboard 40%
Spiral Wound Tubes Comprised of paper only 90%
1 Calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average. 2 Required content based on weighted average (by weight) of all components in packaging part (e.g., liners and mediums in
corrugated).
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 5-18
Minimum Plastic Recycled Content for NEWLY DESIGNED and RE-DESIGNED plastic
packaging starting Jan 2022
Category Comments/Examples Recycled Content3
Plastic bags Equipment dust covers
Documentation consolidation bags
30%
Plastic trays and inserts Plastic trays or parts cradles 30%
Foamed plastics Foam LDPE end caps/blocks
Expanded PS end caps/blocks
30%
TBD
Mixed material plastic packaging Anti-static bags TBD
3 Calculated as percent of total packaging part weight over the course of a year using a weighted average. Includes pre-
consumer and/or post-consumer recycled plastic.
Supplier Name:
Authorized by:
Print name Print title
Signature Date
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-19
6. Revision History
Rev Date Changes
OR 05Aug02 • Original release – Harmonized
B 10Aug07 • Major revision adding China RoHS, Japan EcoMark and Korean marking
requirements.
C 26Oct07 • Amend requirement 3.5 to include the statement: “Compliance with ISPM-15
shall be based on heat treatment (HT) only. Methyl bromide (MB) fumigation
is prohibited to support Xerox applications.”
• Removed “Green Dot” from Appendix C
D 16Dec08 • Section 2: New terms defined
• Requirement 3.6 added requiring conformance with formaldehyde emission
limits specified in 93120-93120.12, Title 17 of the California Code of
Regulations.
• Requirements 3.8 and 3.10 to packaging of machines, options and
consumables/supplies.
• Requirement 3.14 added: All non-reusable packaging shall be separable.
Moved from best practice to a requirement for machines, options and
consumables/supplies. Remained a best practice for FRU/spares and
incoming materials to Xerox manufacturing facilities.
• Best practice 4.6. added to the list
• Appendix A: Addition of “Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) only permitted in parts used
for ensuring safety (i.e., electrical cable, tube, tape, sleeve and battery, fuse
breaker, electrolytic capacitor, switch, terminal block).”
• Appendix A: (Asia Pacific Prohibited Substances): Removal of substances
prohibited before the date of this Standard.
• Appendix B: Limited requirements to packaging of machines, options,
consumables/supplies and FRU/spares (i.e., excluded requirement for stretch
wrap, shrink film, banding, tape, desiccant and pallets).
• Appendix B: Added symbol for natural wood that had been mistakenly deleted
last version.
• Appendix B: The symbol for corrugated fiberboard is not marked as “optional”
(i.e., Mobius loop is mandatory).
• Appendix B: (Paper) Added “Not required for packaging with a surface area
smaller than 200 mm2”.
• Appendix B: (Metal, Glass, Wood) Added “Not required for packaging
components with a surface area smaller than 5x103 mm2”.
• Appendix B: (Marking Requirements for Korea) revised to state: “Note: This
requirement does not apply to the packaging of consumables, spare parts and
options. It only applies to the foam cushions on products including printers,
scanners and copiers.”
• Appendix B: Removed requirements for Japan
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-20
• Appendix D: Added U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
recommended recovered fiber content for paperboard and packaging
components.
E 21Mar09 • Added Appendix E, Substances of Very High Concern as listed in the
European Union Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH) Directive
• Appendix A updated to include Perfluorooctane sulfonate (PF)S) and remove
PBDO.
F 23Mar09 • Removed requirement: “Composite wood products, including packaging
materials made from hardwood plywood, particle board and medium density
fiberboard must comply with the formaldehyde emission limits specified in
93120-93120.12, title 17, California Code of Regulations. A label, in
conformance with the regulation, is to be applied to every finished good
produced or to every box containing finished goods. Any additional
documentation required for compliance, including exemptions for sell-through
provisions, is to be provided upon request.”
G 17Jul09 • Updated Appendix A (Prohibited Substance list) to include dimethylfumarate
(DMF) and cobalt dichloride.
H 04Jan12 • Changed internet link to standard (www.xerox.com)
• Minor changes for clarification.
• Revised 3.11 for clarity
• Revised to comply with EPEAT as follows:
- Revised section 3.12 to be consistent with exact language in EPEAT.
- Added sections 3.14, 3.15, 3.16 and Appendix E.
- Removed section <6.6> and Appendix D.
• Deleted Appendix containing REACH list and replaced with link to European
Chemicals Agency (ECHA) in section 3.13.
• Revised Appendix B to comply with latest Korean requirements.
J 13Oct15 • Revised Appendix B to comply with revised plastic packaging HDPE and
LDPE marking requirements for China.
• Revised Appendix B to comply with latest Korean requirements.
K 02Nov18 • Contact address updated to [email protected] from
• Changed internet link to: https://www.xerox.com/en-us/about/supplier-
relations/packaging-standards
• Added Xerox footnote and revision details to standard
L 10Jun19 • Section 3 - Information on completion of EHS1001 added to requirements
section
• Appendix A – now provide direct links to EHS1001 standard and forms where
all substance restrictions are listed and actively maintained
• Appendix A – Additional detail added to halogen containing polymers
restriction, identifying source of requirement
EHS-710 Requirements for Packaging 6-21
• Section 3 - Revised language regarding weight and type of packaging to be
provided to Xerox.
• Section 3 - Added new reporting template to mandatory requirements
• Appendix C – EHS Labeling Requirements table revised and updated
• Appendix D and E have been revised to show completed documents must be
returned to Tori Deyoung.
• Review completed of all referenced standards and measures contained in the
standard
• Removed the following requirement - “The following are prohibited only for
products that will be distributed in Asia-Pacific market areas: Brominated
Flame Retardants (BFR) in addition to PBB and PBDE”
M 31Mar20 • Section 2: Additional examples of non-packaging and tertiary packaging
provided in the definitions section
• Section 4: Information provided on single use plastics and the approval for
use
• Section 5: Appendix A – Removal of the halogen containing polymers
requirement (Blue Angel) as this has now been added to the substance
restriction standard -EHS1001
N 09Oct20 All sections – updated to latest branding requirements
O 04Jan22 • Definition of mineral oils and prohibition of mineral oils in packaging inks
• Marking requirements aligned with EU 129/97/EC - Identification system
(alphanumeric code) for packaging material pursuant to 94/62/EC
• New requirement for a QR code on all NEW/RE-DESIGNED corrugated
packaging after Jan 2022
• Updated recovered material content requirements for corrugated from 25% to
50%.
• Added minimum recycled content requirements for plastic packaging
• Added plastics recycled content requirements for NEWLY SUPPLIED and
RE-DESIGNED plastic packaging AFTER Jan 2022 to supplier certification
letter template.
P 20Jan22 • Modified QR code requirements to include additional translated languages
(PFIGS+Dutch+English)
• Clarified required & optional cardboard box markings in the event of limited
space
• Added “Furthermore, packaging inks are certified not to contain mineral oils”
to supplier certification letter
C 7 1 2 0 / C 7 1 2 5 / C 7 1 3 0
Xerox® VersaLink® Color Multifunction Printer The Workplace Assistant that can do it all. Even print.
Technology
ConnectKey®
A D A P TA B L E T E C H N O L O G Y T H AT F L E X E S W I T H YO U
Your work is always evolving, so you need technology that's always a step ahead. Xerox® ConnectKey® Technology-enabled VersaLink provides the adaptability needed to support advancements in technology and work processes. With regular firmware updates and an ever-growing collection of productivity tools delivered with the App Gallery, VersaLink helps you stay ahead of the change.
B R E E Z E T H R O U G H TA S K S E F F O R T L E S S LY
Getting up to speed is easy with a tablet-like touch screen that balances simplicity and time-saving efficiency. The familiar, intuitive user interface (UI) guides you through tasks, eliminating extra steps. And the ability to personalize the UI empowers you to work the way you want.
Mobility features, like Wi-Fi Direct, take the hassle out of printing directly from your favorite mobile devices. Near Field Communication (NFC) lets you authenticate with a smartphone to connect in seconds, and the Xerox® Quick Link app enables you to quickly connect and print without IT support, reducing the burden on IT teams.
And with VersaLink Devices, more capabilities means added convenience, not more complexity. Leading-edge scanning functionality and automation of physical and digital workflows allow you to scan, digitize and route information without missing a beat, reducing errors and saving time. Furthermore, industry-specific apps for education, healthcare, legal and more help you stay plugged in and productive.
H E L L O , DIG I TA L R E S I L I E N C E
Translator. Proofreader. Form checker. Do-it-all digitizer. VersaLink makes it easy to tackle the hardest challenges. Stay ready with access to an expanding portfolio of cloud-hosted apps and the ability to tailor solutions for your specific needs through the Xerox Partners program.
And with access to Xerox® Workflow Central Platform, a cloud-based solution that takes the guesswork out of converting physical and digital files into usable formats right from the VersaLink user interface, even complicated work processes are easy. It helps you get the most out of your Workplace Assistant, so you can stay productive and secure from the office or on the move.
P R O A C T I V E S E C U R I T Y YO U C A N C O U N T O N
VersaLink’s multi-layered protection safeguards all system components. A comprehensive range of proactive security features stop even the most sophisticated security threats where they start, preventing malicious attacks, proliferation of malware, unauthorized access or changes and breaches that lead to downtime.
To simplify security event reporting and management, VersaLink Devices can integrate with Security Information and Event Management (SIEM1) Tools. Trellix# whitelisting constantly monitors, detects and blocks threats in real time. And automated security responses provide invaluable time savings and peace of mind.
S U P E R IO R I M A G E Q UA L I T Y
Color is the difference between communications that fall flat and those with real impact. With high-resolution output of 1200 x 2400 dpi, the VersaLink takes your documents to the next level with sharp image quality.
S U S TA I N A B I L I T Y W I T H O U T C O M P R O M I S E
All VersaLink Devices meet or exceed the strictest globally recognized standards for sustainability, including EPEAT and ENERGY STAR®, providing environmental benefits without ever having to compromise on performance or quality.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
What will you need tomorrow? It’s tough to predict the future, but with VersaLink, it’s easy to be
prepared. In fact, print just scratches the surface of what’s possible. Along with built-in, comprehensive
security features, these Workplace Assistants deliver the everyday, must-have capabilities you need
now with plenty of room to add new features as your work evolves.
X E R O X C O N N E C T K E Y T E C H N O L O G Y
Intuitive User Experience Tap into a tablet-like experience with gesture-based touch screen controls. Easy personalization, plus simple workflows and functions.
Mobile and Cloud Ready Enjoy mobile flexibility with cloud-hosted services. Instantly connect to cloud and mobile devices right from the user interface.
Comprehensive Security Prevent unauthorized access, detect threats and protect data and documents with built-in proactive security features.
Enables Managed Print Services Boost workplace efficiency, productivity and security with seamless integration with Xerox® Managed Print Services.
Gateway to New Possibilities Do your best work with the apps from the Xerox App Gallery. Don’t see an app for your specific need? Our partners can develop a custom solution for you.
Learn more about expanding and customizing your capabilities at ConnectKey.com.
# Trellix formerly known as McAfee. Device firmware will reflect Trellix brand change in future software release.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer Configuration
I N C R E A S E V E R S AT I L I T Y W I T H F I N I S H I N G O P T IO N S 2M A X I M I Z E PA P E R C A PA C I T Y W I T H O N E O F T H E S E F E E DI N G O P T IO N S 2
The Office Finisher provides advanced finishing functions, 500 sheet stacker, 3 position stapling and optional hole punch.
Card Reader Bay with embedded USB port.3
130-sheet2 Single-Pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) saves time by simultaneously scanning both sides of two-sided documents with up to 80 impressions per minute (ipm). High paper capacity drives productivity, especially for tasks that require large batches of scanned or copied documents.
The 100-sheet Bypass Tray handles media sizes from 3.5 x 3.87 in to 11.69 x 17 in/88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The standard 520-sheet2 Tray 1 handles media sizes from 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The Dual Off-set Catch Trays4
stack up to 250 sheets each. The Integrated Office Finisher provides 500-sheet stacking and 50-sheet, dual position stapling.
The Work Surface and Convenience Stapler staples up to 50 sheets and provides plenty of elbow room to sort documents.
User interface is an intuitive, tablet-like, 7-inch tiltable touch screen that allows you to complete tasks in just a few effortless taps and lets you personalize your experience. Gain access to 100+ productivity apps through the Xerox App Gallery. Try it out at xerox.com/VersaLink7100UI.
The Single Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Stand Module offers total paper capacity of 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray) and provides storage for toner cartridges and other supplies
The Three Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 2,180 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Tandem Tray Module allows for total paper capacity of up to 3,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The High-Capacity Feeder holds 2,000 sheets of Letter/A4 paper, increasing the maximum paper capacity to 5,140 sheets.
The Envelope Tray can replace Tray 1 to provide feeding of up to 60 envelopes.
The Office Finisher with Booklet Maker simplifies booklet making, including score and saddle-stitch. Use it to create 64-page saddle-stitched booklets (2 to 16 sheets).
Technology
ConnectKey®
© 2023 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, CentreWare®, ConnectKey®, DocuShare®, Global Print Driver®, VersaLink® and Xerox Extensible Interface Platform® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. XMPie® is a trademark of XMPie, Inc. Mopria® is a trademark of the Mopria Alliance. The information in this brochure is subject to change without notice. 01/23 TSK-3718 BR34217 VC7BR-05UB
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
More information is available at xerox.com/VersaLink.
DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS VersaLink C7120 VersaLink C7125 VersaLink C7130 Speed5 Up to 20 ppm Up to 25 ppm Up to 30 ppm Monthly Duty Cycle6 Up to 87,000 pages Up to 107,000 pages Up to 129,000 pages Hard Drive/Processor/Memory 320 GB HDD4/1.05 GHz Dual core/4 GB Memory Connectivity Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T, High-speed USB 3.0, Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® with optional Wi-Fi Kit, NFC Tap-to-Pair Controller Features Unified Address Book, Configuration Cloning, Scan Preview, Xerox Extensible Interface Platform®, Xerox® App Gallery App,
Xerox® Standard Accounting Tool, Role Based Permissions, Convenience Authentication Enabled, Online Support Copy and Print Resolution Copy: Up to 600 x 600 dpi; Print: Up to 1200 x 2400 dpi First-copy-out Time (as fast as) As fast as 8.1 seconds color/
As fast as 5.7 seconds black-and-white As fast as 8.1 seconds color/ As fast as 5.7 seconds black-and-white
As fast as 6.7 seconds color/ As fast as 4.4 seconds black-and-white
First-print-out Time (as fast as) As fast as 8.8 seconds color/ As fast as 6.9 seconds black-and-white
As fast as 8.8 seconds color/ As fast as 6.7 seconds black-and-white
As fast as 7.0 seconds color/ As fast as 5.4 seconds black-and-white
Page Description Languages PCL® 5e/PCL 6/PDF/XPS/TIFF/JPEG/HP-GL/optional Adobe® PostScript® 3™ Paper Input2 Standard Single-Pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF): 130 sheets: Speed: up to 80 ipm;
Custom sizes: 1.93 x 3.35 in to 11.69 x 17 in/49 x 85 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm Bypass Tray: 100 sheets; Custom sizes: 3.5 x 3.87 in to 11.69 x 17 in/88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm Tray 1: 520 sheets; Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm
Choose One Single Tray Module: 520 sheets; Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm Single Tray with Stand Module: 520 sheets; Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm Three Tray Module (1,560 sheets): 520 sheets each; Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm Tandem Tray Module (2,520 sheets): Tray 2: 520 sheets; Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in to 11.69 x 17 in/139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm; Tray 3: 870 sheets; Standard sizes: 8.5 x 11 in and 7.25 x 10.5 in/A4 or B5; Tray 4: 1,130 sheets; Standard sizes: 8.5 x 11 in and 7.25 x 10.5 in/A4 or B5
Optional Envelope Tray: Up to 60 envelopes: #10 commercial, Monarch, DL, C5; Custom sizes: 3.9 x 5.8 in to 6.4 x 9.5 in/98 x 148 mm to 162 x 241 mm High-Capacity Feeder (HCF): 2,000 sheets; Standard sizes: 8.5 x 11 in and 7.25 x 10.5 in/A4 or B5
Paper Output/ Standard Finishing2 Optional
500-sheet Center Tray Dual Off-set Catch Trays6: 250 sheets each; Lower tray offsets Integrated Office Finisher: 500-sheet stacker, 50 sheets stapled, dual position stapling Office Finisher: 2,000-sheet stacker, 50 sheets stapled, 3-position stapling, optional hole-punch, optional booklet maker (score, saddle stitch) Convenience Stapler and Work Surface: Staples 50 sheets
I N T U I T I V E U S E R E X P E R I E N C E Customize Customize user interface, show/hide functions, personalize user experience with authentication, create 1-Touch Apps Print Drivers Job Identification, Bi-directional Status, Job Monitoring, Xerox® Global Print Driver®, Application Defaults, Xerox® Pull Print Driver Xerox® Embedded Web Server PC or Mobile — Status Information, Settings, Device Management, Cloning, Remote Control Panel Print Features Print from USB, Sample Set, Saved Job, Booklet Creation, Store and Recall Driver Settings, Scaling, Job Monitoring, Application Control, Two-sided Printing,
Draft Mode; Optional: Print From Cloud Repositories (Dropbox, OneDrive, and Google Drive) via optional apps Scan and Fax Scan Preview, Scan to USB/Email/Network (FTP/SFTP/SMB), Scan File Formats: PDF, PDF/A, JPG, TIFF; Convenience Features: Scan to Home, Searchable
PDF, Single/Multi-page PDF/TIFF, Password-protected PDF; Fax Features: Walk-up Fax (one-line or three-line options available, includes LAN Fax, Direct Fax, Fax Forward to Email), Fax dialing, Unified Address Book, Optical Character Recognition (OCR), Server Fax, TWAIN driver (scan); Optional: Scan To Cloud Repositories (Dropbox, OneDrive, and Google Drive)
M O B I L E A N D C L O U D R E A D Y Mobile Connectivity Near Field Communication (NFC); Optional: Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g/n/ac); AirPrint™ (iOS) including iBeacon (Bluetooth) Mobile Printing Mopria® Print Service, Apple AirPrintTM, Xerox® Print Service (Android), Xerox® @PrintByXerox App; Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android) Mobile Scanning Mopria® Scan, Apple AirPrintTM; Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android) Cloud Ready Remote services enabled; Optional: direct connection to cloud hosted services via optional apps (accessed via Xerox App Gallery app or visit xerox.com/AppGallery) C O M P R E H E N S I V E S E C U R I T Y Network Security 802.1x, IPsec, HTTPS, SFTP and Encrypted Email, Trellix# Enterprise Security Manager1, LogRhythm SIEM1, Splunk SIEM1, Network Authentication, SNMPv3,
SHA-256 Hash Message Authentication, TLS 1.1/1.2/1.3, Security Certificates utilizing ECDSA, Automatic Self-signed Certificate, Cisco® Identity Services Engine (ISE) integration, Local Authentication (Internal Database), FIPS 140-2
Device Access User Access and Internal Firewall, Port/IP/Domain Filtering, Audit Log, Access Controls, User Permissions, TPM; Optional: Smart Card Enablement Kit (CAC/PIV/.NET/SIPRNet)7, Xerox® Integrated RFID Card Reader, NFC standard (authentication via optional Xerox® Workplace Cloud/Suite Print Management and Content Security; learn more at xerox.com/WorkplaceSolutions)
Data Protection Trellix# Embedded Control Whitelisting, Firmware Verification, Job Level Encryption via HTTPS and Drivers, Encrypted and Signed Email; Encrypted Hard Disk (AES 256-bit, FIPS 140-2) with Image Overwrite; Optional: Xerox Workplace Cloud/Suite Content Security, Trellix# Integrity Control
Document Security Under evaluation Common Criteria Certification (ISO 15408) full system against the HCD PP, Encrypted Secure Print, FIPS 140-2 Encrypted Data with Print Drivers E N A B L E S M A N A G E D P R I N T S E R V I C E S Print Management Xerox® Standard Accounting; Optional: Xerox Workplace Suite/Cloud, Xerox® Virtual Print Management Service, more at xerox.com/PrintManagement Fleet/Device Management Xerox® CentreWare® Web, Xerox® Support Assistant, Automated Meter Read, Xerox® Cloud Fleet Management Solution, Configuration Cloning;
Xerox® Easy Assist App; Optional: Managed Print Services Suite, Cloud-based remote management with Xerox Workplace Cloud7 Security Secure Device Management: Xerox® Printer Security Audit Service (auto-configuration of security settings, monitoring, and auto-remediation),
Digital Certificate Management, SIEM Reporting, Interactive Dashboard Reports G A T E W A Y T O N E W P O S S I B I L I T I E S Xerox and Partner Apps Automate everyday processes with apps that translate, redact, convert text to audio or handwritten notes to text files, and paper documents to Microsoft
applications, all from a single cloud-based platform. Or visit xerox.com/WorkplaceApps to find apps by industry or workflow Software and Solutions Xerox DocuShare (xerox.com/ecm), XMPie (xerox.com/XMPie), Xerox Workplace Solutions (xerox.com/WorkplaceSolutions),
Xerox WorkFlow Central Platform 1 SIEM support with Xerox® Device Manager. 2 Paper capacities are based on 20 lb/75 gsm stock; capacities will vary with different weight stocks. 3 USB ports can be disabled. 4 HDD and Dual Off-set Catch Trays are optional on Desktop model. 5 Declared print speed in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734. 6 Maximum volume capacity expected in any one month. Not expected to be sustained on a regular basis. 7 Not available in all markets. # Trellix formerly known as McAfee. Device firmware will reflect Trellix brand change in future software release. Certifications: xerox.com/OfficeCertifications
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus (77001613) Reference number 261480 Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse võimalusega (e-kataloog)
We hereby declare that ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ is Xerox Master Authorized Service Partner and is authorized by Xerox Ltd. to act as primary service center in Estonia, has the right to perform warranty and guarantee maintenance services for Xerox printers and MFP.
We confirm that Xerox multifunctional printers offered by ABom Kaubanduse OÜ are manufactured by Xerox company and have an official warranty time as required, which are provided by local authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ.
Contracting authorities are able to control the duration of the warranty terms through Xerox authorized partner ABcom Kaubanduse OÜ in Baltics. We confirm that contractor can request information regarding warranty for offered printers ([email protected]). Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
Registered Office: Xerox Limited, Building 4, Uxbridge Business Park, Sanderson Road, Uxbridge,
Middlesex UB81DH.
Registered in England No. 575914.
July 11th, 2023 Letter of Confirmation To whom it might concern Dear Sir / Madam, This Letter serves to confirm the following: The Xerox Versalink C7130 model have following possibilities:
- Equipment technology – laser technology/laser multifunctional device; - Device supports offline copying; - key components, consumables and spare parts will be available for at least 4 years after
the discontinuation of production of the respective model; - Offered model is compatible with 3rd party software solutions for secure printing: SafeQ,
SafeCom, Equitrac, Papercut, MYQ, UniFlow; - Offered model is compatible with Estonian ID card and different RFID card usage as
requested in tender specification without additional 3rd party equipment; - Compatible and supports RFID authentication using Microsoft AD/LDAP; - Scanning functions support FTP scanning and authentication using Microsoft AD/LDAP
The Xerox Altalink C8155 model have following possibilities:
- Equipment technology - laser tehnology/laser multifunctional device; - Device does not have permanently protruding plastic paper guides and holders and other
slightly breakable or loose elements from the case; - Device supports offline copying; - key components, consumables and spare parts will be available for at least 4 years after
the discontinuation of production of the respective model; - Offered model is compatible with 3rd party software solutions for secure printing: SafeQ,
SafeCom, Equitrac, Papercut, MYQ, UniFlow - Offered model is compatible with Estonian ID card and different RFID card usage as
requested in tender specification without additional 3rd party equipment; - Compatible and supports RFID authentication using Microsoft AD/LDAP; - Scanning functions support FTP scanning and authentication using Microsoft AD/LDAP
Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me: [email protected] +371 291 84891 Yours sincerely Laura Erdmane
Xerox Regional Partner Manager for Baltics and Moldova
Central Eastern Europe Distributor Group
Xerox Ltd. Representative office in Latvia
Raunas str. 44
Riga, Latvia
p +37129184891
System Specifications VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
One-sided Speed1
8.5 x 11 in./A4/210 x 297 mm Up to 20 ppm (pages per minute) long edge feed (LEF)
Up to 25 ppm LEF Up to 30 ppm LEF
8.5 x 14 in./216 x 356 mm
11 x 17 in./A3/297 x 420 mm
Up to 13 ppm
Up to 11 ppm
Up to 16 ppm
Up to 14 ppm
Up to 20 ppm
Up to 17 ppm
Two-sided Speed1
8.5 x 11 in./A4/210 x 297 mm
8.5 x 14 in./216 x 356 mm
11 x 17 in./A3/297 x 420 mm
Up to 20 ppm LEF
Up to 9 ppm
Up to 8 ppm
Up to 25 ppm LEF
Up to 10 ppm
Up to 9 ppm
Up to 30 ppm LEF
Up to 12 ppm
Up to 11 ppm
Monthly Duty Cycle2 Up to 87,000 pages/month2 Up to 107,000 pages/month2 Up to 129,000 pages/month2
Recommended Average Monthly Print Volume3
Up to 5,500 pages Up to 6,250 pages Up to 7,000 pages
Hard Drive 320 GB HDD (Optional on Desktop/Base Unit)
Processor 1.05 GHz Dual-Core
Memory 4 GB
Connectivity Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T, High-speed USB 3.0, Wi-Fi 802.11n/g/b/a, Wi-Fi Direct, and Bluetooth (iBeacon) with optional Wi-Fi Kit (concurrent wired and wireless connections supported), NFC Tap-to-Pair
Controller Features Embedded Security and Integrity Control, TLS1.3 Support, NIST800-171r1 Compliance Print on Available Media, Mopria, Remote Install Wizard - Secure Fax Remote Enable/Disable, Air Print
User Interface Languages English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, Russian, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Norwegian, Greek, Turkish, Polish, Arabic, Czech, Hungarian, Romanian, Catalan, Ukrainian, Croatian
Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series Color Multifunction Printers are built on Xerox® ConnectKey® Technology. For more information, go to www.connectkey.com.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Device Specifications
Electrical Requirements
North America Voltage: 110-127 V -10%/+6% Frequency: 50/60 Hz +/-3%, 12A
Europe and Other Geographies Voltage: 220-240 V +/-10% Frequency: 50 Hz +/-3%, 8A
Power Consumption
Printing4 For 110 V and 220 V: 20 ppm = 0.3 kWh or less; 25 ppm = 0.4 kWh or less; 30 ppm = 0.52 kWh or less
Standby Mode4 94 watts or less
Sleep Mode4 0.4 watts or less
Operating Environment
Required Temperature Range (Storage) 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)
Required Temperature Range (Operating) 50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Required Relative Humidity 10% to 85%
Sound Power Levels Printing: 6.9 B(A) or less
• 20 ppm = 6.45 B(A); 25 ppm = 6.50 B(A); 30 ppm = 6.9 B(A)
Standby: 4.10 B(A) or less
• 20 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 25 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 30 ppm = 4.10 B(A)
Full System (including Finisher and HCF) Printing: 20 ppm = 7.15 B(A); 25 ppm = 7.18 B(A); 30 ppm = 7.35 B(A) Standby: 20 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 25 ppm = 4.10 B(A); 30 ppm = 4.10 B(A)
Boot Time (from Off to UI Ready) As fast as 60 seconds
Warm-up Time (from Sleep to UI Ready)
As fast as 12 seconds
Dimensions and Weight (Unpackaged)
Width Depth Height Weight
Base Unit (Desktop Model) 23.23 in./590 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 30.18 in./766.5 mm 137.9 lbs./62.5 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 196 lbs./88.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 220.5 lbs./100 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module 24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 200.4 lbs./90.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Office Finisher (with Booklet Maker)
44.69 in./1135.2 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in/1117.2 mm 277.5 lbs./125.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Integrated Office Finisher 25.98 in./659.9 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 224.9 lbs./102 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module, Office Finisher, Booklet Maker, and High Capacity Feeder
57.1 in./1451.4 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 346 lbs./156.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module and Integrated Office Finisher
26.3 in./668.0 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 244.9 lbs./111.1 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module, Office Finisher, Booklet Maker, and High Capacity Feeder
57.1 in./1451.4 mm 26.71 in./678.6mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 366 lbs./166 kg
Certifications
To view the latest list of certifications, go to www.xerox.com/OfficeCertifications.
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer Configuration
I N C R E A S E V E R S AT I L I T Y W I T H F I N I S H I N G O P T IO N S 5M A X I M I Z E PA P E R C A PA C I T Y W I T H O N E O F T H E S E F E E DI N G O P T IO N S 5
The Office Finisher provides advanced finishing functions, 500-sheet stacker, 3-position stapling, and optional hole punch.
Card Reader Bay and embedded USB port.6
130-sheet5 Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) saves time by simultaneously scanning both sides of two-sided documents with up to 80 impressions per minute (ipm). High paper capacity drives productivity, especially for tasks that require large batches of scanned or copied documents.
The 100-sheet Bypass Tray handles media sizes from 3.5 x 3.87 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The standard 520-sheet5 Tray 1 handles media sizes from 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./ 139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm.
The Dual Off-set Catch Trays7
stack up to 250 sheets each. The Integrated Office Finisher provides 500-sheet stacking and 50-sheet, dual position stapling.
The Work Surface and Convenience Stapler staples up to 50 sheets and provides plenty of elbow room to sort documents.
User interface is an intuitive, tablet-like, 7-inch, tiltable touch screen that allows you to complete tasks in just a few effortless taps and lets you personalize your experience. Gain access to 100+ productivity apps through the Xerox App Gallery. Try it out at xerox.com/VersaLink7100UI.
The Single Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Stand Module offers total paper capacity of 1,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray) and provides storage for toner cartridges and other supplies
The Three Tray Module (optional with desktop model) increases total paper capacity to 2,180 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The Tandem Tray Module allows for total paper capacity of up to 3,140 sheets (includes Bypass Tray).
The High Capacity Feeder holds 2,000 sheets of Letter/A4 paper, increasing the maximum paper capacity to 5,140 sheets.
The Envelope Tray can replace Tray 1 to provide feeding of up to 60 envelopes.
The Office Finisher with Booklet Maker simplifies booklet making, including score and saddle-stitch. Use it to create 64-page saddle-stitched booklets (2 to 16 sheets).
5 Paper capacities are based on 20 lb/75 gsm stock; capacities will vary with different weight stocks. 6 USB ports can be disabled. 7 HDD and Dual Off-set Catch Trays are optional on Desktop model.
Print VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
First-Print-Out Time As fast as 8.8 seconds color As fast as 8.8 seconds color As fast as 7.0 seconds color
As fast as 6.9 seconds black As fast as 6.7 seconds black As fast as 5.4 seconds black
Print Resolution Up to 1200 x 2400 dpi
Page Description Languages PCL® 5e, 6 PDF TIFF JPEG HP-GL Adobe® PostScript® 3™ (Optional)
Maximum Print Area 4 mm from Lead edge of paper, 2 mm from Side and Trail edges of paper
Print Features Application Defaults Banner Pages Enable/Disable Bi-directional Real-time Status Booklet Layout Color Adjustments (lightness, contrast, saturation, color balance) Color Correction Draft Mode Finishing Fit to New Paper Size Job Identification (Print ID or Banner, Print ID in margins on first page only or all pages) Job Monitoring (Client or Local User Interface) LAN Fax (requires Fax Kit) N-up Page Layout (up to 16 pages per sheet) Paper Selection by Attribute Personal Print Print Around Enable/Disable Print from USB Sample Set Saved Job Scaling Secure Print Skip Blank Pages Special Pages (exception page programming: covers, inserts, exceptions pages) Store and Recall Driver Settings Stored Jobs Deletion Two-sided Printing (as default) Watermark (predefined and custom) Xerox® Earth Smart Driver Settings
Print from USB Allows walk-up printing from Type A USB port Supports direct printing from computer via Type B USB port Supported file formats: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, PDF/A
Operating Systems Windows®, 7, 8, 8.1, 10, 11 Windows Server 2008 SP2, Server 2008 R2 SP1, Server 2012, Server 2012 R2, Server 2016 Mac OS® version 10.12, 10.13, 10.14, 10.15, 11, 12 Citrix®
Redhat® Enterprise Linux®
Fedora Core SUSE®
SAP®
IBM® AIX®
HP-UX®
Oracle® Solaris Note: For information about supported versions for the above operating systems, please visit our Drivers & Downloads page and specify your device at www.support.xerox.com.
Fonts PostScript fonts: 136 PCL fonts: 83
Xerox® Global Print Driver® A truly universal print driver that lets IT administrators install, upgrade, and manage non-Xerox and Xerox® Devices from a single driver. It provides a consistent, easy-to-use interface for end-users, reducing the number of support calls and simplifying print services management
Xerox® Pull Print Driver Makes it easy for IT managers to qualify, deploy, and manage all print devices using a single driver in a Pull Print environment. Uses a single queue and driver. The Xerox® Pull Print Driver extends convenience across a broad range of printing assets. IT administrators no longer need to manage and configure multiple drivers. Used in conjunction with Equitrac Office®, Ysoft® SafeQ®, Pharos®, and others
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Copy VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
Document Scanner 130-sheet Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Document Scanner Size Platen: Up to 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm DADF: Up to 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm
Simplex Copy Speed Up to 20 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 20 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 25 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 25 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 30 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 30 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Duplex Copy Speed Up to 20 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 20 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 25 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 25 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Up to 30 cpm (copies per minute) 8.5 x 11 in.
Up to 30 cpm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
First-Copy-Out Time As fast as 8.1 seconds color As fast as 8.1 seconds color As fast as 6.7 seconds color
As fast as 5.7 seconds black As fast as 5.7 seconds black As fast as 4.4 seconds black
Sides (input:output) 1:1, 1:2, 2:2, and 2:1
Quantity 1 to 999
Resolution (max.) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Reduction/Enlargement Variable zoom from 25% to 400% in 1% increments
Concurrency Concurrent scanning and printing
Copy Features Annotation (Page Numbers, Comments, Date Stamp, Bates Stamping)* Auto-color Sensing Automatic Background Suppression Book Copying with Center Erase Booklet Copying* Collation Color Balance Color Effects Darkness Control Edge Erase Front Cover ID Card Copy Image Enhancement Image Shift Lighten/Darken N-up Original Orientation Original Size Original Type Page Layout Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 400% Sample Copy Saturation Sharpness *Requires HDD/Productivity Kit
Scan
Capability Black-and-white and color scanning
Concurrency Scan while the system is printing copy or network print jobs, or while it is transferring scan to network or fax jobs
Simplex Input Speed Black-and-white: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 297 mm) Color: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./80 ipm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Duplex Input Speed Black-and-white: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 297 mm) Color: Scan up to 80 ipm – 8.5 x 11 in./80 ipm A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Resolution Optical – 600 x 600 dpi
Bit Depth 24-bit color/8-bit grayscale
Maximum Scan Area Platen: 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm Document Feeder: 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 431.8 mm
Network Filing Protocols FTP SMTP SMB
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Scan
File Formats JPG TIFF (single and multi-page) PDF (single and multi-page) Searchable PDF via Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Password-protected PDF Linearized PDF (set via embedded web server) and PDF/A
Scan Driver Compatibility (Network Only)
WIA TWAIN
Supported Scan Destinations Scan to Home Scan to USB Scan to Email Scan to Network (Browse FTP or Browse SMB)
Workflow Scanning (Optional Features)
Scanning Apps and Xerox App Gallery
Scan to: DocuShare Go, Dropbox, Google Drive, Microsoft OneDrive, Microsoft 365, Box, Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android). See the full list of apps available in the Xerox App Gallery: xerox.com/AppGallery
PSTN One-Line or Three-Line Fax (Optional) Fax8
Fax Speed 33.6 Kbps
Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi, Fine 200 x 200 dpi, Super Fine 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 dpi
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Fax Features Walk-up Fax, includes LAN Fax, Direct Fax, Fax Forward to Email, Fax dialing via Unified Address Book (up to 2,000 contacts)
Fax Over IP (Optional)
Compliance T.38 compliant IP/SIP
Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi, Fine 200 x 200 dpi, Super Fine 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 dpi
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Fax Features Walk-up Fax, includes LAN Fax, Direct Fax, Fax Forward to Email, Fax dialing via Unified Address Book (up to 2,000 contacts)
Mobile and Cloud Ready
Mobile Connectivity Near Field Communication (NFC); Optional: Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g/n/ac), AirPrint™ (iOS) including iBeacon (Bluetooth)
Mobile Printing Mopria® Scan, Apple AirPrint™, Xerox® Print Service (Android), @PrintByXerox App; Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android), AirPrint™ (iOS) including iBeacon (Bluetooth)
Mobile Scanning Mopria® Scan, Apple AirPrint™, Optional: Xerox® Workplace Mobile App (iOS/Android)
Mobile Apps and Xerox App Gallery
Automate everyday processes with apps that translate, redact, eSign, personalize, print, convert, route, collaborate, and communicate. Visit xerox.com/WorkplaceApps to find apps by industry or workflow. Software and services: Xerox® DocuShare® Content Management Platform (xerox.com/ecm), XMPie® (xerox.com/XMPie), Xerox® Workplace Solutions (xerox.com/WorkplaceSolutions)
Xerox® Workplace Central Platform
One-platform consistency for seamless productivity across computers, mobile devices, and printers. With the Workflow Central platform’s ever-expanding suite of cloud-based workflows, you can change documents into audio files for easy listening, convert PDF or image files to popular Microsoft formats for shareability with a wider audience, turn handwriting into legible, editable, and shareable text, translate to/from over 40 different languages, and automatically redact Personal Identifiable Information using set words or phrases
Xerox® Workplace Suite and Xerox® Workplace Cloud
Optional: Xerox® Workplace Suite is a modular set of workflows designed to save customer’s time and money by providing effective control over their print fleet, while enabling worker productivity and mobility through a set of robust workflows. Xerox enables ultimate customer flexibility by offering these capabilities in both an on-premises server version (Workplace Suite) and a cloud based-version (Workplace Cloud) of this solution
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Security
Security Features Access Controls AES 256-bit Encryption Audit Log Certificate Path Validation Certificate Revocation List (CRL)/Status Protocol (OCSP) Detection of External Program Falsification (XCP Plug-in) Cisco® Identity Services Engine (ISE) Integration Domain Filtering FIPS 140-2 Firmware Verification Immediate Disk Overwrite* IP Address Filtering IPsec Network Authentication NIST800-171r1 Compliance Port Filtering Pre-installed Self-Signed Certificates Role-based Permissions Secure Email Secure Fax Secure Print Security Certificate Management Smart Card Enablement (CAC/PIV/.NET) SNMPv3 Status Protocol (OCSP) TLS1.3/SSL Support Trellix# – Embedded Control and Integrity Control Whitelisting *Requires HDD/Productivity Kit
Accounting
Xerox® Standard Accounting/Network Accounting (Standard)
Tracking Copy, Print, Fax, Scan, and Email usage
Accounting Xerox® Standard Accounting Feature Up to 1,000 User Accounts without HDD Up to 9,999 User Accounts with HDD Up to 500 General Accounts Network Accounting (Job-based Accounting) Up to 1,000 User IDs; Up to 1,000 Account IDs without HDD Up to 60,000 User IDs; Up to 60,000 Account IDs with HDD Up to 14,000 Accounting Records (transactions)
Features Administrator can manage the feature via the Embedded Web Server
Accounting Options – Network Accounting (Allows central server to manage all accounting)
• Enhanced network accounting with up to the minute data on how the system is being used • Comprehensive management and enterprise-scale tracking and reporting of device usage of copy, print,
scan, and fax • Numerous solutions are available through Xerox Alliance Partners. For details, visit www.xerox.com • Security enhancements include simultaneous support for HTTP/HTTPS protocols • Device requests account authentication from third party server enabling larger databases of users and accounts • Accept Authentication Login at control panel and pass to third party Networking Account
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
#Trellix formerly known as McAfee. Device firmware will reflect Trellix brand change in future software release.
Paper Handling
Document Feeder
Capacity5 Single-pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF): 130 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 1.93 x 3.35 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./ 49 x 85 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
11 to 34 lb. bond/38 to 128 gsm 13 to 34 lb. bond/50 to 128 gsm
Bypass Tray
Capacity5 100 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 3.5 x 3.87 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./88.9 x 98.4 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 216 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Tray 1
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Extra Heavyweight Labels Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Single Tray Module (Optional – Base Model Only)
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Single Tray Module with Stand (Optional)
Capacity5 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Envelopes Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Three Tray Module (Optional)
Capacity5 Tray 2: 520 sheets Tray 3: 520 sheets Tray 4: 520 sheets
Sizes Custom sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Heavyweight Labels Extra Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
High Capacity Tandem Tray Module (Optional)
Capacity5 Tray 2: 520 sheets Tray 3: 870 sheets Tray 4: 1,130 sheets
Sizes Tray 2: Custom Sizes: 5.5 x 7.17 in. to 11.69 x 17 in./139.7 x 182.0 mm to 297.0 x 431.8 mm Tray 3: Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5 Tray 4: Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 95 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Types Bond Cardstock Custom Glossy Cardstock Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Cardstock Heavyweight Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Heavyweight Labels Heavyweight Labels Extra Hole Punched Labels Letterhead Lightweight Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reload Plain Paper Pre-printed Recycled
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Envelope Tray – Replaces Tray 1 (Optional)
Capacity5 Up to 60 envelopes
Sizes #10 commercial, Monarch, DL, C5 Custom sizes: 3.9 x 5.8 in. to 6.4 x 9.5 in./98 x 148 mm to 162 x 241 mm
Weights 20 to 25 lb. bond/75 to 90 gsm
High Capacity Feeder (Optional)
Capacity5 2,000 sheets
Sizes Standard Sizes: 8.5 x 11 in. and 7.25 x 10.5 in./A4 or B5
Weights One-sided: Two-sided:
16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 216 gsm 16 lb. bond to 60 lb. cover/60 to 169 gsm
Total Capacity
Base Unit Capacity5 620 sheets
Single Tray Module Capacity5 1,140 sheets
Single Tray Module with Stand Capacity5
1,140 sheets
Three Tray Module Capacity5 2,180 sheets
High-Capacity Tandem Tray Capacity5
3,140 sheets
Finishing
Finishing Output Trays (Optional on Base Model)
Dual Off-set Catch Trays5 250 sheets each; Lower tray offsets
Integrated Office Finisher (Optional)
Stacking Tray 500 sheets of 20 lb. bond/80 gsm – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 or 250 sheets of 20 lb. bond/80 gsm – 11 x 17 in./A3
Sizes 3.5 x 3.9 in. to 11.7 x 17 in./89 x 98 mm to 297 x 432 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 256 gsm
Stapling Dual Auto Stapling 50 sheets maximum: Letter/A4/B5-size sheets (less than 90 gsm or (2) 220 gsm covers) 30 sheets maximum: Legal/Tabloid/A3/B4-size sheets (less than 90 gsm or (2) 220 gsm covers)
Office Finisher (Optional)
Capacity5 Stacking Tray: 2,000 sheets unstapled or 1,000 sheets single stapled or 750 sheets dual stapled (8.5 x 11 in./A4)
Sizes 5.8 x 5.8 in. to 11.7 x 17 in./148 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm
Weights 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/60 to 220 gsm/Office Finisher GB up to 256 gsm
Multiposition Stapling 50 sheets of 24 lb. bond/90 gsm
Hole Punch (Optional) North America: Europe:
2-3 Hole Punch 2-4 Hole Punch
Booklet Maker for Office Finisher (Score/Crease, Saddle-Stitch Staple) (Optional)
Capacity5 40 booklets (2-15 sheets per booklet – 20 lb./80 gsm or less)
Sizes Letter – 8.5 x 11 in./A4 SEF Legal – 8.5 x 14 in./B4 SEF Ledger – 11 x 17 in./A3 SEF
Saddle-stitch Stapling 2-15 sheets/8-60 page booklet 16 lb. bond to 80 lb. cover/64 to 220 gsm
Score/Crease 1-15 sheets/unstapled/52-105 gsm
Convenience Stapler and Work Surface (Optional)
Capacity5 50-sheet stapling 5,000 staples Requires a separate outlet
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Device Management
Network Protocols TCP/IP: HTTP/HTTPS, Internet Printing Protocol, LPR/LPD, Raw Socket Printing/Port 9100, IPv4/IPv6, WSD LDAP Bonjour®/AirPrint™ FTP Most protocols not in use can be disabled
Administrative Protocols DHCP, SNMP, WINS, HTTP, HTTPS, TLS, SNTP, MDNS
Management Support SNMP Version 1, SNMP Version 2c, and SNMP Version 3 trap over TCP/IP and IP MIB access (IETF-MIBII RFC 1213) Host Resources MIB RFC 2790, Printer MIB RFC 3805, PWG-Imaging-System- Power MIB, Xerox® Easy Assist App
Xerox® CentreWare® Web Software
• A web-based server application for network administrators that permits web browser-based device management from any workstation, running Windows, UNIX, or any other operating system
• Works with any SNMP-managed printer from any manufacturer • Provides help with device discovery and installations, health checks and troubleshooting, and device upgrades, as
well as basic accounting and asset management
Embedded Web Server – Integrated Device Web Page
Device Status • Tray Status/Contents • Consumables Status • Billing/Usage • Quick Links • Online Support
Print Queue Viewing Job print queue management — view and delete
Job Submission Print-ready files (PS (with optional PostScript option), PCL, PDF, JPEG)
Device Administration Allows simple, remote installation setting of configuration options and management of the device
Xerox® Device Manager Xerox® Device Manager collects and manages the data that drives fact-based decisions for your enterprise device management environment. It is a single tool to install print queues and configure, manage, monitor, and report on both networked and locally connected devices – regardless of vendor – across your enterprise. Xerox® Device Manager provides: • Device monitoring and troubleshooting • Remote configuration of SNMP v3 • Extensive reporting and discovery of new devices • Usage collection, chargeback, and billing capabilities • Auto-detect Xerox® Device Manager server and download configurations files for touchless remote install
Xerox® Workplace Cloud Remote management to set and audit device configuration data with Xerox® Workplace Cloud, eliminating the need for an on-site server
Browsers Microsoft® Internet Explorer® Microsoft Edge™ Mozilla™ Firefox® Apple® Safari® Google Chrome™
Remote Services
Automatic Meter Readings (AMR)
Automates the process of collecting and submitting meter reads for the tracking and billing of Xerox® Device usage. Eliminates the need for time-consuming end-user involvement and ensures that meter reads are submitted to Xerox on time
Automatic Supplies Replenishment (ASR)
Automatically orders supplies for output devices from Xerox based on actual usage, eliminating the need to manually manage supplies inventory
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer
Return spent imaging supplies through the Xerox® Green World Alliance® collection/reuse/recycling program. For more information, visit www.xerox.com/About-Xerox/Recycling.
For more information, visit us at www.xerox.com/Office.
Configurations vary by geography.
© 2023 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, CentreWare®, ConnectKey®, Global Print Driver®, and VersaLink® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information in this brochure is subject to change without notice. 01/23 TSK-3720 BR34254 VC7SS-02UB
1 Declared print speed in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734. 2 Maximum volume capacity expected in any one month. Not expected to be sustained on a regular basis. 3 Recommended average throughput is not a minimum, but is intended to cover a range of volumes for different environments. 4 Power states defined per ENERGY STAR® Program requirements for Imaging Equipment. 5 Paper capacities are based on 20 lb./75 gsm stock; capacities will vary with different weight stocks. 6 USB ports can be disabled. 7 HDD and Dual Off-set Catch Trays are optional on Desktop model. 8 Requires analog phone line. 9 Average standard pages. Declared yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Toner yield can vary due to many factors including, but not limited to,
image area coverage, image content, media size, run mode, application types, monthly print volumes, and image quality set-points. 10 Approximate pages. Declared yield will vary depending on job run length, media size/orientation, and machine speed.
For more information, visit: https://www.office.xerox.com/latest/SUPGL-01U.pdf.
Supplies Description Yield
Sold Toner Cartridges Cyan Magenta Yellow Black
18,500 standard pages9
18,500 standard pages9
18,500 standard pages9
31,300 standard pages9
Metered Toner Cartridges Cyan Magenta Yellow Black
20,300 standard pages 20,300 standard pages 20,300 standard pages 31,300 standard pages
Drum Cartridge Black Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
109,000 standard pages10
87,000 standard pages10
Waste Toner Bottle 1 Cartridge 30,000 pages
Booklet Maker Cartridge (8 cartridges per carton) 1 Cartridge Carton 16,000 staples
(2,000 each cartridge)
Staple Refills for Finishers (3 refills per carton) 1 Refill Carton 15,000 staples
(5,000 each refill)
Staple Cartridge for Finishers (1 cartridge per carton) 1 Cartridge 5,000 staples
© 2023 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, ConnectKey®, Green World Alliance®, and VersaLink® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 11/22 TSK-3725 BR34598
VERSION 1.1 January 2023
Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series Color Multifunction Printer Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
1 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Contents 1. Product Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Product Highlights ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3 System/Device Specification ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
2. Optimum Product Performance ............................................................................................................................. 5 Average Monthly Print Volume and Maximum Duty Cycle .............................................................................................. 5 System Productivity ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Simplex and Duplex Productivity ................................................................................................................................................. 6 Media and Substrate ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Environmental Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 8 Energy Star ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3. Maintenance and Support ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Software Upgrades ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Support Services .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Remote Services .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Supplies and Consumables ......................................................................................................................................................... 12
4. Installation Planning ................................................................................................................................................ 14 Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................................................................................ 14 Installation Considerations ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
5. Installation Requirements ...................................................................................................................................... 15 Electrical Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Power Cord ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Connectivity for Remote Services ............................................................................................................................................ 16 Module Dimensions ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Space Requirements/Service Space Envelope .................................................................................................................... 19 Mobility Plate Information ......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Audible Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Network Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Fax Telephone Line Requirements (Optional) .................................................................................................................... 21 Convenience Stapler (Optional) ................................................................................................................................................ 21 Sleep Mode Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Auto Power Off Settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
2 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
6. Operational Considerations ................................................................................................................................... 22 Image Quality Expectations ....................................................................................................................................................... 22 Print Expectations ........................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Registration ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 23 Maximum Printable Area ............................................................................................................................................................. 23 Finishing Stapling Positions ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 Non-Standard Paper Sizes ........................................................................................................................................................... 26 USB Print ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 26 Print Around ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 Apple® AirPrint™ .............................................................................................................................................................................. 27 Network Connectivity Expectations ........................................................................................................................................ 27 Scanning Expectations ................................................................................................................................................................. 27 Security Expectations .................................................................................................................................................................... 28 Service Uptime ................................................................................................................................................................................. 28 Solutions ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 28 Operational Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 29
VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
3 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
1. Product Overview
Introduction
What will you need tomorrow? It’s tough to predict the future, but with VersaLink®, it’s easy to be prepared. In fact, print just scratches the surface of what’s possible. Along with built-in, comprehensive security features, these Workplace Assistants deliver the everyday, must-have capabilities you need now with plenty of room to add new features as your work evolves.
Product Highlights
ADAPTABLE TECHNOLOGY THAT FLEXES WITH YOU
Your work is always evolving, so you need technology that's always a step ahead. Xerox® ConnectKey® Technology-enabled VersaLink® provides the adaptability needed to support advancements in technology and work processes.
BREEZE THROUGH TASKS EFFORTLESSLY
Getting up to speed is easy with a tablet-like touch screen that balances simplicity and time-saving efficiency. Mobility features take the hassle out of printing directly from your favorite mobile devices. Near Field Communication (NFC) lets you authenticate with a smartphone, and the Xerox® Quick Link app enables you to quickly connect and print.
And with VersaLink® Devices, more capabilities means added convenience, not more complexity. Leading- edge scanning functionality and automation of physical and digital workflows allow you to scan, digitize and route information. Furthermore, industry-specific apps for education, healthcare, legal and more help you stay plugged in and productive.
HELLO, DIGITAL RESILIENCE
VersaLink® makes it easy to tackle the hardest challenges. Stay ready with access to an expanding portfolio of cloud-hosted apps and the ability to tailor solutions for your specific needs through the Xerox Partners program.
PROACTIVE SECURITY YOU CAN COUNT ON
VersaLink’s multi-layered protection safeguards all system components. A comprehensive range of proactive security features stop even the most sophisticated security threats where they start, preventing malicious attacks, proliferation of malware, unauthorized access or changes and breaches that lead to downtime. *Trellix Whitelisting and integrations formerly known as McAfee® Whitelisting and integrations. Trellix brand name will be reflected in future firmware releases.
SUPERIOR IMAGE QUALITY
With high-resolution output of 1200 x 2400 dpi, the VersaLink® takes your documents to the next level with sharp image quality.
SUSTAINABILITY WITHOUT COMPROMISE
All VersaLink® Devices meet or exceed the strictest globally recognized standards for sustainability, including EPEAT and ENERGY STAR®, providing environmental benefits without ever having to compromise on performance or quality.
Find out more about how you’ll work smarter at www.connectkey.com
PRODUCT OVERVIEW VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
4 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
System/Device Specification
For information related to the topics listed below, please consult the Detailed Product Specification document: https://www.office.xerox.com/
System Specification Copy and Print Mobile Scan Fax Security Accounting Device Specification Accessories System Certification/Regulatory Compliance Paper Handling Finishing Unified Address Book for Fax, Internet Fax, Email, and Scan to… Device Management Supplies
OPTIMUM PRODUCT PERFORMANCE VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
5 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
2. Optimum Product Performance
Average Monthly Print Volume and Maximum Duty Cycle
Print Speed and Monthly Volume
VersaLink® C7120 VersaLink® C7125 VersaLink® C7130
Simplex Speed1 and Duplex Speed Color/B&W
Up to 20 pages Up to 25 pages Up to 30 pages
Average Monthly Print Volume
Up to 5,500 pages Up to 6,250 pages Up to 7,000 pages
Monthly Duty Cycle
Up to 87K pages Up to 107K pages Up to 129K pages
What is a Duty Cycle?
Duty Cycle is a print device’s maximum rated capacity to continuously perform over a single month under normal conditions. This is not expected to be sustained on a regular basis.
What is AMPV?
The average monthly print volume (AMPV) is the print device’s rated capacity for consistent performance month after month under normal conditions.
What is the difference between AMPV and Duty Cycle?
When discussing a print device’s capabilities, there is often a misconception regarding the Duty Cycle and AMPV. Duty cycles are guidelines for a maximum monthly print volume and are not intended for continuous operation while AMPV allows for consistent performance over time under normal conditions.
It is not recommended to print the maximum monthly print volume over a sustained period of time. 1 Declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734
System Productivity
Productivity
The Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 are multifunction printers. These devices may cycle down between each page depending on job complexity.
The continuous print speeds shown in table below are for feeds from Trays 1 – 4. Speed from Bypass Tray (5) will be slightly lower.
SEF= Short Edge Feed
LEF= Long Edge Feed
OPTIMUM PRODUCT PERFORMANCE VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
6 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Simplex and Duplex Productivity
Productivity for Internal Trays 1-4
* Duplex not supported
Size Mode Weight
VersaLink® C7120 Color/Black Speed
VersaLink® C7125 Color/Black Speed
VersaLink® C7130 Color/Black Speed
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Bond, Plain, Recycled, Plain Reload*, Custom 1-5
16 lb – 28 lb Bond (60 – 105 gsm)
20/20 20/20 25/25 25/25 30/30 30/30
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
16/16 16/16 19/19 19/19 23/23 23/23
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
13/13 9/9 16/16 10/10 20/20 12/12
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
11/11 8/8 14/14 9.4/9.4 17/17 11/11
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Lightweight Cardstock, Lightweight Cardstock Reloaded*, Lightweight Glossy Cardstock, Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reloaded*, Labels*
32 lb Bond – 60 lb Cover (106 – 169 gsm)
12/20 12/20 12/25 12/25 12/25 12/25
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
8/16 8/16 9/19 9/19 9/19 9/19
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
7/13 4/9 8/16 5.2/10 8/16 5.2/10
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
6/11 3/8 7/14 4.8/9.4 7/14 4.8/9.4
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Cardstock*, Cardstock Reloaded*, Glossy Cardstock*, Glossy Cardstock Reloaded* Heavyweight Cardstock*, Heavyweight Cardstock Reloaded*, Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock*, Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reloaded*, Heavyweight Labels*, Extra Heavyweight Labels*
65 lb – 80 lb Cover* (170 – 216 gsm)* 85 lb – 95 lb Cover* (217 – 256 gsm)+
11/11 - 12/12 - 12/12 -
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
8/8 - 9/9 - 9/9 -
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
7/7 - 8/8 - 8/8 -
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
6/6 - 7/7 - 7/7 -
OPTIMUM PRODUCT PERFORMANCE VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
7 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Productivity for Bypass Tray 5
Size Paper Type Weight
VersaLink® C7120 Color/Black Speed
VersaLink® C7125 Color/Black Speed
VersaLink® C7130 Color/Black Speed
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
Simplex ppm
Duplex ipm
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Bond, Plain, Recycled, Plain Reload*, Custom 1-5
16 lb – 28 lb Bond (60 – 105 gsm)
19/19 19/19 21/21 22/22 26/26 27/27
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
15/15 16/16 17/17 17/17 21/21 22/22
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
13/13 8.9/8.9 14/14 9.9/9.9 18/18 11/11
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
11/11 7.9/7.9 13/13 9.1/9.1 15/15 10/10
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Lightweight Cardstock, Lightweight Cardstock Reloaded*, Lightweight Glossy Cardstock, Lightweight Glossy Cardstock Reloaded*, Labels*
32 lb Bond – 60 lb Cover (106 – 169 gsm)
11/19 11/19 12/21 12/22 12/21 12/22
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
7.8/15 7.9/16 8.7/17 8.8/17 8.7/17 8.8/17
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
6.8/13 4/8.9 7.8/14 5.2/9.9 7.8/14 5.2/9.9
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
5.9/11 3/7.9 6.8/13 4.7/9.1 6.8/13 4.7/9.1
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 LEF
Envelope*, Postcard*, Cardstock*, Cardstock Reloaded*, Glossy Cardstock*, Glossy Cardstock Reloaded*
65 lb – 80 lb Cover* (170 – 216 gsm)*
11/11 - 12/12 - 12/12 -
8.5 x 11 in./ A4 SEF
7.8/7.8 - 8.7/8.8 - 8.7/5.7 -
8.5 x 14 in./ B4 SEF
Heavyweight Cardstock*, Heavyweight Cardstock Reloaded*, Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock*, Heavyweight Glossy Cardstock Reloaded*, Heavyweight Labels*, Extra Heavyweight Labels*
85 lb – 95 lb Cover* (217 – 256 gsm)+
6.8/6.8 - 7.8/7.8 - 7.8/7.8 -
11 x 17 in./ A3 SEF
5.9/5.9 - 6.8/6.8 - 6.8/6.8 -
* Duplex not supported
OPTIMUM PRODUCT PERFORMANCE VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
8 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Note: Table is for Base Configuration, dependent on optional accessories, operating environment and job programing.
Note: Heavy and Glossy papers may result in increased image mottle. It is recommended that high quality papers available through Xerox, with even paper formation, be used to minimize the amount of mottle.
Media and Substrate
• For more detailed information on throughput materials, please refer to the Xerox Materials Usage Guide and the Recommended Media List at: Americas: https://www.xeroxpaperusa.com/en-us/resources/recommended-media-list EMEA: https://www.xerox.co.uk/printer-supplies/printer-papers/engb.html
• Using coated (e.g., gloss, matte coated, or photo finished/proofing) and/or cardstock (i.e., >90lb Index/164 gsm) may result in degraded reliability performance. Customers using these materials exclusively or extensively will see decreased performance as it relates to image quality and product reliability
• Attempts to feed heavier than recommended paper stocks, and/or misuse of the media settings, may cause machine damage or poor image quality. Using media at run modes other than that recommended for the grade may cause poor image quality and machine damage
• Envelope printing should not be used as a primary application • Envelopes without windows are supported through the bypass tray in sizes Monarch, DL, C5, and Number
10 (other custom sizes are supported as well). Envelope feeding reliability is highly dependent on the envelope used and the area coverage of the image being affixed to it
• The optional envelope tray replaces Tray 1. The customer is responsible for installing the envelope tray • Specialty media may not provide optimum image quality at the extremes of the environmental range
Environmental Features
• The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 series Series delivers cutting-edge reductions in energy consumption. • Conserve Energy with Green Technologies
– Emulsion Aggregate (EA) Toner: Lower power required compared to conventional toner for more energy savings and a brilliant glossy output, even on ordinary paper
– LED scanner: The power consumption of the scanner using LED lighting is 1/3 of traditional scanners using fluorescent lamps
• Manage Resource Usage and Print Responsibly: – Energy Management. With Cisco® EnergyWise, enabled by Xerox® Power MIB (Management
Information Base), you can control, manage, and report your device’s power consumption information, and set optimal power states and timeout intervals.
– Earth Smart printing. Innovative new Earth Smart feature allows you to choose the most environmentally sensitive options for your print jobs.
• Xerox operates a worldwide equipment take back and reuse/recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800-ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox® Product is part of the program. For more information about our environmental programs, visit: www.xerox.com/environment (US)
Packaging Take-Back Service for Xerox® Products: Return spent imaging supplies through the Xerox® Green World Alliance® collection/reuse/recycling program. For more information, visit www.xerox.com/About-Xerox/Recycling Whenever possible, Xerox encourages you to recycle packaging locally as it reduces greenhouse gas emissions associated with transportation. However, if unable to recycle locally, please check with your local sales and service team for recycling instructions
OPTIMUM PRODUCT PERFORMANCE VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
9 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
US only: If you are unable to recycle locally, we offer a packaging take-back and recycling service to our customers for Xerox® Products, where customers pay for the return shipping and Xerox pays for the recycling. If interested in this service, please send your packaging to: Xerox Corporation, ESSO – Scrap, 6500 State Route 63, Middletown OH 45044 The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series is Energy Star certified. For more information, please visit the Industry Certifications site
Energy Star
Energy Star is a government-backed program, helping businesses and individuals protect the environment through superior energy efficiency. The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series is Energy Star certified. For more information, please visit the Industry Certifications site.
After an idle period, the machine switches to sleep mode, saving additional power. The Customer can adjust the “Time to Sleep Mode” as described in the System Administrator Guide
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
10 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
3. Maintenance and Support This section helps define the support and services that Xerox will supply and what is expected of the customer.
Software Upgrades
• Periodically updated software will be available on www.xerox.com • Software can be installed on to the machine via the automatic upgrade utility tool, which is also located
on xerox.com
Support Services
Call Procedure
Xerox Customer Support Centers are available to provide general information, answer questions, and take service calls. You can reach the Customer Support Center at the following toll-free phone numbers:
Technical Support Contact Information
Geography Country Phone Number Email
Americas US 1-800-821-2797
Canada 1-800 ASK XEROX (800 275 9376)
Mexico 800 0093769
Brazil 08009793769/70
Chile 800200600 [email protected]
Peru 80077777 [email protected]
Ecuador 1800937691 [email protected]
EMEA UK 0370 900 5501
France 0825 012 013
Switzerland (French-speaking) 043 299 90 01
Belgium (French-speaking) 2 713 14 52
Embourg (French-speaking) 352 480123
Germany 069 999915632
Switzerland (German-speaking) 043 299 90 00
Austria (German-speaking) 01 207 9000
Italy 02 999 53 428
Switzerland (Italian-speaking) 043 299 90 02
Holland 020 656 3620
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
11 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Belgium (Flemish-speaking) 2 713 14 53
Spain 915203346
Portugal 0707 200578
Denmark 7010 7288
Norway 815 00308
Finland 09 69379666
Sweden 0771 178808
Bulgaria +359 2 4606939
+359 2 4606919
Eurasia +8 (800) 70088 82 (toll-free for Russia)
Russia +7 (495)956 37 12 (toll-free for Moscow)
Ukraine +38 (044) 201 20 37 (toll-free for Ukraine)
Hungary +36 1 436 8800
Turkey +90 212 3547200
Poland +22 878 78 78
Czech +420 227 036 444
Slovakia +421 2 4363 5594
Israel +972 73 7151900 +972 73 7151919
Romania +4021 30 33 600
India 1 800-103-1225
(+91) 0120 5022000
Egypt +20224612888
If requested, customer training is available on a fee basis. Please see your Xerox customer representative for details.
Remote Services
Remote Services can be used to obtain Device Support Logs to be sent to Xerox engineering during a problem investigation:
• The device must have access to the Internet, either directly or through a proxy • An administrator initiates a data push from the device’s web page. To enable this, please refer to the
Systems Administrator Guide
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
12 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Remote Services enable devices to perform daily data pushes. This sends meters and device “health” information back to Xerox to be used for AMR/ASR, future troubleshooting, and overall understanding of device performance. No PII (personally identifiable information) or CII (customer identifiable information) data is contained in the daily data push.
Supplies and Consumables
Supplies Description Quantity Part Number
Supplies
5% Area Coverage1
ISO/IEC 19798 2
Toner Cartridge (Metered)
Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
22,500 pages 15,500 pages 15,500 pages 15,500 pages
31,300 pages 20,300 pages 20,300 pages 20,300 pages
006R01820 006R01821 006R01822 006R01823
Toner Cartridge (North America and Europe Sold)
Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
22,500 pages 14,000 pages 14,000 pages 14,000 pages
31,300 pages 18,500 pages 18,500 pages 18,500 pages
006R01824 006R01825 006R01826 006R01827
Toner Cartridge (DMO Sold)
Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
22,500 pages 14,000 pages 14,000 pages 14,000 pages
31,300 pages 18,500 pages 18,500 pages 18,500 pages
006R01828 006R01829 006R01830 006R01831
Staple Cartridges
Staple Cartridge for Finishers (1 cartridge per)
5,000 staples (5,000 each cartridge)
008R12964
Booklet Maker Cartridge (8 cartridges per)
16,000 staples (2,000 each cartridge)
008R12897
Staple Refills Staple Refills for Finishers (3 refills per)
15,000 staples (5,000 each refill)
008R12941
Additional Supply Items
Drum Cartridge3
(1 Cartridge per Color)
Black Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
109,000 pages 87,000 standard pages
013R00688
Waste Toner Bottle4
1 Bottle 30,000 pages 115R00128
Long Life Supply Items5
Fuser 120V 1 Assembly 100,000 pages 115R00114
Fuser 220V 1 Assembly 100,000 pages 115R00115
Second Bias Transfer Roll (BTR)
1 Assembly 200,000 pages 115R00126
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)
1 Assembly 200,000 pages 115R00127
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
13 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Frequency of supplies replenishment for printing and periodic maintenance will vary depending on monthly print volume, type of maintenance contract, and applications. Check with your supplies help desk for details. 1 Toner cartridge yield is based on 5% area coverage on 8.5 x 11 in./A4 LEF. Toner yield can vary due to many factors including, but not limited to, image area coverage, image content, media size, media orientation, run mode, application types, monthly print volumes, and image quality set-points. 2 Toner Cartridge yield as declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Toner yield can vary due to many factors including, but not limited to, image area coverage, image content, media size, media orientation, run mode, application types, monthly print volumes, and image quality set-points. 3 Average drum yield may also vary and is based on a run length of (3) 8.5 x 11 in./A4 LEF pages, with split of 30% color/70% B&W pages. 4 The Waste Toner Container yield will vary depending on the type of image, area coverage percentage, and job run length. 5 Long life supply items are typically not required, no need for local stocking.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
14 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
4. Installation Planning
Roles and Responsibilities
This section is key to clearly state Xerox and the customer roles and responsibilities and necessary actions.
Responsibility Matrix
Action Customer Xerox
Ensure adequate space and power to configure the Xerox®C7120/C7125/C7130 X
Unpack system/components X
Install system hardware (excluding Envelope Tray), if applicable X
Install Envelope Tray X
Connect all system components prior to powering up the system X
Ensure network configuration X
Confirm network integrity X
Acquire and install utilities and print drivers on client PCs X
Configure Workflow Scanning X
Run initial software diagnostics when directed X
Monitor and adjust as required X
Load any additional fonts X
Order and replace Smart Kits (Drum Cartridges, Second Bias Transfer Roll, Transfer Belt Cleaner, and Waste Toner Cartridge, etc.) as needed
X
Provide helpline support X
Provide spare parts X
Provide service X
Installation Considerations
• There should be a minimum of 78 inches (1,981 mm) clearance from the floor to the nearest overhead obstruction
• The Base Configuration unit weighs about 147.71 lbs./62.5 kg • Electrical and space requirements must be satisfied before the equipment is delivered. • One network drop is required for installation
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
15 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
5. Installation Requirements
Electrical Requirements
Western Hemisphere: North America and some South America
Eastern Hemisphere: Europe/Asia/South America/Africa
Electrical VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130
Voltage Voltage: 110-127 VAC -10%/+6% Frequency: 50/60 Hz +/- 3%, 12 A
Voltage: 220-240 VAC +/- 10% Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 3%, 8 A
Receptacle NEMA part #: 5-15R Requires the use of a 10-ampere outlet, which is standard in most modern office buildings. Consult with local services to determine the country- specific receptacle and confirm the existence of this outlet in the proposed installation space.
Power Cord Length
8.5 feet (2.59 m) 7.55 feet (2.3 m)
*Ethernet cable to be supplied by the customer
Power Cord
Use the power cord supplied with your printer. Plug the power cord directly into a properly grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that each end of the cord is connected securely. If you do not know if an outlet is grounded, ask an electrician to check the outlet.
WARNING: To avoid risk of fire or electrical shock, do not use extension cords, power strips, or power plugs. Always adhere to national and local building, fire, and electrical codes regarding the length of the cord, conductor size, grounding, and protection.
• Do not use a ground plug to connect the printer to an electrical outlet that does not have a ground connection terminal
• Verify that the printer is plugged into a wall outlet that provides the correct voltage and power. Review the electrical specification of the printer with an electrician if necessary
• Secure the power cord in place using the bracket provided with the printer • Do not place the printer in an area where people can step on the power cord • Do not place objects on the power cord • Do not plug or unplug the power cord while the power switch is in the on position • If the power cord becomes frayed or worn, replace it • To avoid electrical shock and damage to the cord, grasp the plug when unplugging the power cord The power cord is attached to the printer as a plug-in device on the back of the printer. If it is necessary to disconnect all electrical power from the printer, disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
16 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Connectivity for Remote Services
For Client Review of Expectations for Remote Services:
1 To the extent necessary to fulfill Service agreements, the Customer grants Xerox, without charge, Remote Data Access. This needs to be enabled by the Customer prior to starting Services using the method prescribed by Xerox. The Customer shall cooperate and assist Xerox in providing Remote Data Access at all times. Xerox will not be responsible for failures to meet service levels where Remote Data Access is not fully maintained by the Customer.
2 Upon the request of Xerox, the Customer shall provide key contact information, such as IT contact name and phone number for support of their devices on their network.
3 Most equipment from Xerox is supported and serviced using data that is automatically collected and transferred to Xerox via electronic transmission from equipment through the Customer’s network (“Remote Data”). This data is considered confidential information under the service agreement terms.
4 Remote Data transmitted from the Customer may include device information such as registration, meter read, supply level, configuration and settings, software version, and problem/fault code data and may be used by Xerox for billing, report generation, supplies replenishment, support services, on-going and future site optimization opportunities, and product improvement purposes.
5 Remote Data Access may also enable Xerox to make available to the Customer maintenance releases or upgrades for software or firmware and to remotely diagnose and modify devices to repair and correct faults.
6 Remote Data will be transmitted to a secure off-site location in a safe manner specified by Xerox in accordance with its published policies on information security at http://www.xerox.com/information-security/enus.html for your region.
Install Support
7 For Install Support that includes Xerox System Analysts: The Customer shall contact and/or be contacted by their Xerox Systems Analyst.
For Install Support that does not include Xerox System Analysts: The Customer shall first utilize their Product System Administrator Guides available at xerox.com, under the Support and Drivers link and by selecting documentation for their desired product. If unsuccessful, the Customer should go to xerox.com and select “Technical Product Support” within the “Contacts” link to determine the appropriate contact for further support.
Connectivity Information
8 See Table Below
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
17 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Setup Remote Services on the Xerox® Device:
Use the following to begin the establishment of Remote Services for your new Xerox® Device. This is not to replace the product System Administrator Guide or Installation Guide but to identify certain install tasks that can be completed before and after the delivery of your device. To take advantage of Xerox® Offerings, the device’s embedded Device Direct feature must be enabled and/or Xerox Device Agent software such as XDA lite, must be installed on a PC. Devices must be connected and communicating either directly or through Xerox Device Agent to Xerox (or both). The following needs to be completed where applicable:
Who?
Cu st
om er
Pr of
es sio
na l
Se rv
ic es
/P ar
tn er
Te ch
ni ca
l S er
vi ce
Re
pr es
en ta
tiv e
PRE-DELIVERY: Device Networking Tasks:
• Print Driver Software: Go to the “Support and Drivers” link on xerox.com. If applicable, print drivers will be available to download and install on your client devices. X
• Installation by Professional Services (optional): To ensure that Device Remote Connectivity can be established, network data will need to be collected by a Xerox systems analyst. A configuration form will be provided and require completion for each device documenting connectivity and network information. Each individual device will require a form, unless all devices are to be configured in the same manner. In those cases, one configuration form along with a list of applicable serial numbers on a separate sheet is acceptable.
X
• IT Policy Compliance: You (the Customer) are responsible for obtaining approval for any internal IT policy compliance required for the device/software from Xerox to communicate via your intranet/internet to Xerox.
X
POST-DELIVERY/INSTALL: Device Networking Tasks:
• Ethernet Cable: You (the Customer) need to provide an Ethernet cable for the device to the network drop. The cable connection can be completed by the Customer or installer depending on the requirements.
X X X
• Sustaining Connectivity: Remote Connectivity must be maintained to take advantage of Xerox® Offerings, which include remote diagnostics, supplies replenishment, and meter reads from appropriate products.
X
• Device Direct (DD) Communications: • Each device will need to communicate to Xerox through the internet via the Device Direct
method for Remote Diagnostics from Xerox or customer self-help support. Follow the steps as required. https://www.xerox.com/en-us/about/account-management/remote-services
X X X
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
18 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Module Dimensions
Dimensions and Weights for Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130 Color Multifunction Printer Configuration Width Depth Height Weight Base Unit 23.23 in./590 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 30.18 in./766.5 mm 137.9 lbs./62.5 kg Base Unit and Integrated Finisher
24.97 in./634.2 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 30.18 in./766.5 mm 162.26 lbs./73.6 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray Module
23.23 in./590 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 34.64 in./879.9 mm 160.9 lbs./73 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with stand Module
24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 196 lbs./88.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module
24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 200.4 lbs./90.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module
24.24 in./615.7 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 220.5 lbs./100 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module and Integrated Finisher
25.98 in./659.9 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 220.5 lbs./100 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Integrated Finisher
25.98 in./ 659.9 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 224.9 lbs./102 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module and Integrated Finisher
25.98 in./659.9 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 244.9 lbs./111.1 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module and Office Finisher
44.65 in./1134.1 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 251.1 lbs./113.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Office Finisher
44.65 in./1134.1 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 255.5 lbs./115.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module and Office Finisher
44.65 in./1134.1 mm 26.41 in./670.8 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 275.6 lbs./125 kg
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module and Office Finisher and Booklet Maker
44.69 in./1135.2 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 273.2 lbs./123.9 kg
Base Unit with Three Tray Module and Office Finisher and Booklet Maker
44.69 in./1135.2 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 277.5 lbs./125.9 kg
Base Unit with High Capacity Tandem Tray Module and Office Finisher and Booklet Maker
44.69 in./1135.2 mm 26.71 in./678.6 mm 44.04 in./1117.2 mm 302 lbs./ 137 kg
Please note, the addition of the High Capacity Feeder adds a weight of 65.9 lbs./29.9 kg and 10.35 in./263 mm to the width of the system.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
19 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Space Requirements/Service Space Envelope
The dimensions shown below provide the overall service space required, including the space to the nearest obstruction. The dimensions reflect both typical and hallway installations and are absolute minimums. The operational space is defined as the minimum required space to enable operation of the device with bypass trays, output trays, and other functional device capabilities in the fully extended position.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
20 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Service Space Requirements for Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130
Configuration Width Depth Height
Base Unit (desktop) 42.8 in./108.6 cm 61.7 in./156.7 cm 44.2 in./112.3 cm
Base Unit with Single Tray with Stand Module or Three Tray Module or Tandem Tray Module
43.9 in./111.5 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Base Unit with one of the 3 optional tray configurations plus Integrated Office Finisher
50.7 in./128.9 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Base Unit with one of the 3 optional tray configurations plus High Capacity Feeder
53.1 in./135 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Base Unit with one of the 3 optional tray configurations plus Office Finisher
65.8 in./167.2 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Base Unit with one of the 3 optional tray configurations plus Office Finisher and Booklet Maker
65.8 in./167.2 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Base Unit with one of the 3 optional tray configurations plus Office Finisher, Booklet Maker, and High Capacity Feeder
75.2 in./190.9 cm 65.6 in./166.6 cm 58 in./147.4 cm
Mobility Plate Information
Carpeted flooring surfaces may require the installation of a mobility plate on the IOT and Finishers to allow the product to be moved during normal maintenance activities.
Audible Noise
Xerox® VersaLink® C7120 C7125 C7130
Sound Power Levels Mono Mode OCT Off OCT On OCT Off OCT On OCT Off OCT On
Printing 6.45 B(A) 6.55 B(A) 6.50 B(A) 6.60 B(A) 6.90 B(A)
Standby 4.10 B(A) 4.10 B(A) 4.10 B(A)
Full System with finisher accessory 7.15 B(A) 7.18 B(A) 7.35 B(A)
Note: OCT stands for Offset Catch Tray and “On” or “Off” refers to the status of the settings for the offsetting function. Devices are defaulted to “On” for offsetting
Network Requirements
• The customer is responsible for connecting and configuring the equipment on their network • One network drop is required for installation
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
21 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Fax Telephone Line Requirements (Optional)
If the fax option is installed, the following telephone line requirements are applicable:
The telephone wall jack should be within 7 feet/ 2,133.6 mm of the middle left side of the back of the unit.
• Telephone Service Supported: – Sole-use, non-switchboard (direct dial) – RJ11 – 6-position, 4-pin modular jack – Single analog line
• For a 3-line fax, additional lines must meet the same requirements. • Analog fax over VOIP is not supported. • T.38 and SIP FOIP is supported (optional)
Convenience Stapler (Optional)
This requires a separate outlet from the one needed for the device. Refer to the above product electrical requirements for outlet type and requirements. The same electrical line as the device may be used, if no other devices are present on the line. This also requires an Work Surface for mounting.
Sleep Mode Settings
The Xerox® Device automatically switches to Sleep mode after a period of inactivity. The customer has the ability to change the timer to a maximum value of 59 minutes. The device automatically wakes from Sleep when the UI button is pressed, a print or fax job is received, or a smart card is swiped. Sleep mode settings will affect energy efficiency.
Auto Power Off Settings
The device automatically switches to OFF mode after a period of inactivity if the customer chooses to enable it. The timer for this inactivity period can be set from 1-24 hours.
Note: Selecting Auto Power Off is not recommended because the device does not respond until you power on the device manually.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
22 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
6. Operational Considerations
Image Quality Expectations
Image Quality
• The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series is designed to produce consistent, uniform-looking color and monochrome prints and copies in the product’s specified Average Monthly Print Volume range
• The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series is designed to produce a uniform image. Image quality is subjective and can be impacted by lighting and is strongly influenced by paper (consult the Recommended Materials List) US: https://www.xeroxpaperusa.com/en-us/resources/recommended-media-list
Quality, Color Management, and Print Resolution
• The appearance of the document displayed on the computer monitor screen may not match the output print due to the following reasons: – The range of colors that can be produced in print is different from what can be displayed on a
computer screen – Different display technologies have different reproductions of color
• Printed colors appear differently under different light sources • The customer is responsible for calibration by using the provided copy and print calibration routines • The PostScript and PCL drivers contain the ability to adjust the print quality. Image adjustments include
color correction modes, the ability to render images at either 600 x 600 (binary) or 1200 x 2400 dpi (binary only). Images are marked at 2400 x 1200 dpi using PCL or PostScript enhanced or PostScript photo modes
• When the print drivers "Color" output mode is selected, grayscale images in MS Office applications may print using composite grays, which contain a visually neutral combination of C, M, Y, and K
• Pages are not guaranteed to print and bill as monochrome unless the "Black and White" output color mode is selected in the print driver
Print Expectations
Duplex (2-sided) Copying/Printing
• The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series can automatically perform two-sided (duplex) copying or printing on media sizes up to 11.7 x 17 in./297 x 432 mm SEF and 169 gsm paper
• Manual duplex can be performed on media up to 256 gsm and a maximum size of 11 x17 in. (A3S) from Tray 5 (Bypass)
• Full duplex print productivity can be achieved except when the paper exits to the top center tray
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
23 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Registration
Printing registration specifications for 8.5 x 11 in. (A4):
• ±2.0 mm (side 1), ±2.4 mm (side 2) along the Lead Edge – Tray 1-4 • ±2.1 mm (side 1), ±2.5 mm (side 2) for the Side Edge – Tray 1-4 • ±2.7 mm – Lead Edge from Bypass • ±3.1 mm – Side Edge from Bypass
Skew registration specifications for side-to-side feeding for 8.5 x 11in/A4:
• ±1.7 mm (side 1), ±2.1 mm (side 2) skew Lead Edge – Tray 1-4 • ±3.2 mm (side 1), ±4.2 mm (side 2) skew Side Edge – Tray 1-4 • ±2.1 mm – Lead Skew from Bypass • ±4.2 mm – Side Skew from Bypass
Maximum Printable Area
Max Image Area: 11.4 x 18.7 in./291 mm x 476.6 mm
Guaranteed Image Quality Area: 11.4 x 16.7 in./289 x 423.4 mm
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
24 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Finishing Stapling Positions
The below diagrams illustrate the various stapling positions that can be selected with the optional Finisher Accessories.
Integrated Office Finisher supported on Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
25 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Office Finisher supported on Xerox® VersaLink® C7120/C7125/C7130
Booklet Saddle Staple available with optional Booklet Maker Module
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
26 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Non-Standard Paper Sizes
• Plain paper with a feed length below 5.5 in. (140 mm) may jam more frequently, which may require replacement of the fuser unit. Therefore, paper transport capability is not guaranteed to meet the specifications for plain paper with a feed length below 5.5 in. (140 mm).
• Image quality is subjective and can be impacted by lighting and is strongly influenced by paper (consult the Recommended Materials List).
• Select media up to 256 gsm are supported, for further details, refer to the Recommended Media List.
Americas: https://www.xeroxpaperusa.com/en-us/resources/recommended-media-list
EMEA: https://www.xerox.co.uk/printer-supplies/printer-papers/engb.html
• Media weights heavier than 80 lb Cover (216 gsm) are not supported by the High Capacity Feeder. • Using coated (e.g., gloss, matte coated, or photo finished/proofing) and/or Cardstock (i.e., >90lb
Index/164 gsm) stock may result in degraded reliability performance. Customers using these materials exclusively or extensively will see decreased performance as it relates to image quality and product reliability.
• Attempts to feed heavier than recommended paper stocks, and/or misuse of the media settings, may cause machine damage or poor image quality. Using media at run modes other than that recommended for the grade may cause poor image quality and machine damage.
• Envelope printing should not be used as a primary application. • Envelopes without windows are supported through the bypass tray in sizes Monarch, DL, C5, and No 10.
(other custom sizes are supported as well). Envelope feeding reliability is highly dependent on the envelope used and the area coverage of the image being affixed to the envelope.
• The optional envelope tray replaces Tray 1. The customer is responsible for installing the envelope tray.
• Specialty media may not provide optimum image quality at the extremes of the environmental ranges.
USB Print
• USB Media Print enables walk-up users to print “Print-Ready” files (PDF, TIFF, JPEG) directly from most standard (FAT-32 formatted) USB thumb drives
• Files are sent directly from the USB drive to the print controller
Print Around
• The Print Around feature holds a job needing additional resources (such as a different paper size) and prints the next job in queue. This function allows the device to keep working, while making sure jobs are printed correctly.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
27 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Apple® AirPrint™
• If AirPrint is not enabled on this product, download the install instructions and airPrintInstall.dlm from the support and driver page for your product at xerox.com and follow the instructions. AirPrint-enabled Connectkey® devices work with the iPad (all models), iPhone (3GS or later), and iPod touch (3rd generation or later), running the latest version of iOS. For printing from a Mac, the device must be running Mac OS X 10.7 or later to support AirPrint. The device submitting the job must be on the same subnet as the printer. To allow devices to print from different subnets, configure your network to pass multicast DNS traffic across subnets.
Network Connectivity Expectations
USB Wireless Network Adapter
• Your Xerox® Device can be equipped with an optional Xerox USB 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) Wireless Adapter to enable Wi-Fi connectivity. When utilizing this device over Wi-Fi, it is important to understand the performance impacts that may result from Wi-Fi technology. Compared to a wired Ethernet connection, Wi-Fi performance varies significantly due to many factors that are specific to wireless technology.
• Some of these factors include: Wi-Fi LAN Overhead, Proximity to Access Point (AP) and Physical Obstacles (i.e. Signal Strength), Network Usage/AP Loading and Radio Frequency (RF) Interference.
Bluetooth Kit: (Optional Accessory)
• Your Xerox® Device can be equipped with an optional Xerox Bluetooth Kit to enable AirPrint™ printer discovery via iBeacon
• iBeacon simplifies local AirPrint™ printer discovery and removes the need for AirPrint™ clients and the printer to be on the same subnet
• For more information, refer to Xerox System Administrators guide
Scanning Expectations
• The Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series supports Scan to Network Folder, Scan to USB, Scan to Home, and Scan to Email functionality as standard.
Scan Resolution
• The maximum image scan resolution is 600 dpi. The default scan resolution is set to 200 dpi. • When scanning the OCR processing, image compression, file formatting, and file transfer operations all
continue after the job has been completed. • Heavy print usage may delay the processing of scan jobs. Note: Several resolution settings are selectable via the User Interface touch panel. Lower resolutions will result in files that are smaller in size, thereby reducing network traffic.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
28 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Security Expectations
Xerox Smart Card, Kerberos, and FIPS140-2 support includes:
• CAC, PIV, .NET cards, S/MIME- encrypted email to self and others via LDAP or Address Book, Email signing
• FIPS 140-2 encryption (SSL only) • FIPS 140-2 encryption (Disk & IPsec) only for IPv4
Trellix Embedded Control
• Trellix Built-in Enhanced Security is the standard offering on the Xerox® VersaLink® C7100 Series that can detect and prevent unauthorized read-modify-write of files by unauthorized persons/systems. Built-in security prevents the unauthorized reading, writing, adding of any of the systems protected files and directories. Any unauthorized attempt to modify these protected filed are recorded to the audit log on the device and can be setup to send email alerts thru CWIS, Embedded Web Server Web, or Xerox Device Manager.
• An optional purchasable Trellix Integrity Control provides the same protections as Embedded Security with some key additions. – Prevents new files from being EXECUTED from ANY location via untrusted means: By utilizing
whitelisting technology from Trellix, the multifunction device prevents a targeted attack from executing an unauthorized and possibly malicious program such as malware.
– Prevents the WRITING of protected executable files: Integrity Control prevents the malicious overwrite of operating system through executables. File Inventory is hashed to prevent malicious changing of it.
• Automatically tracks new devices (via Profiler with Advanced license) connecting to the network. • “Firewalls” the printer to prevent general access to restricted printers. • Automatically provides and grants printers appropriate network access to prevent impersonation and
inappropriate access. • Single inventory for printer management, access, and location-aware printer management. • Default administrator password.
Service Uptime
• The number of copies or prints between service calls on a digital color copier/printer is highly dependent on customer expectations of quality and the use of applications and throughput materials
• Monthly usage that exceeds published average monthly volumes could result in more frequent service
Solutions
• A full list of supported solutions can be found at: www.office.xerox.com/software-solutions
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS VERSALINK® C7100 SERIES
29 | Customer Expectation and Installation Guide
Operational Definitions
Operational Definitions
1-Sided Printing on only one side of the substrate
2-Sided Printing on both sides of the substrate
AMPV Average Monthly Print Volume - maximum single monthly volume range, not to be sustained over an extended period of time
Daily Maintenance Maintenance that the customer operator must complete daily to maintain quality printing
Delta E The measurement of color variation, there are many
dpi Dots Per Inch or physical resolution of the printing device
Duplex Printing on both sides of the substrate
Duty Cycle Print device’s rated capacity to continuously perform work under normal conditions. It is usually expressed as “Maximum volume capacity” expected in any one month in letter or A4 size pages. The Duty Cycle is not expected to be sustained on a regular basis
gsm Grams per Square meter – Paper density (also known as basis weight and grammage)
Image Registration The alignment of the individual CMYK image to each other on the printed piece
ipm Images per minute
Lbs. Pounds - US paper sizes is pounds of a ream of 500 (or in some cases 1000) sheets of a given (raw, still uncut) basis size – heavier stocks have a higher lb rating
Maximum Paper Size Largest substrate that can be physically run through the device
Maximum Print Area Largest area that can be printed on a substrate
Media/Substrate The material that can be imaged through a device (e.g. uncoated, coated, cover stock, transparency, etc.)
Multifunction Printer/Copier
A device that can be A4 or A3 with capabilities of scan, fax, email, and can be integrated with multiple solutions
Operator Maintenance
Maintenance tasks for which the customer is responsible
Paper Registration The placement/alignment of the image on the sheet and sheet to sheet
Periodic Maintenance
Maintenance that occurs based on print volume
Press Relates to production devices (graphic communications) concerned with high production and high image/color quality requirements
Preventative Maintenance
Any actions that are taken to prevent downtime and maintain quality printing
Print Quality The characteristic of printed material evaluated in terms of color, register, clarity, and the degree to which it resembles the original image
Print Speed The rated speed at which a device can print
Printer A smaller device (usually A4) that relates to the office side of the business
Simplex Printing on only one side of the substrate
Uptime The time that the device is available for printing
Virus Security Protection for multifunction printers, similar to how you protect PCs from viruses and malware, and control access to end points on your network – making your multifunction printer a fully secured network citizen
October 2022 Version 6.7
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide
©2022 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved.
Xerox®, WorkCentre®, and Phaser® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other counties. BR17445
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Vista®, SQL Server®, Microsoft®.NET, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, Access®, and Windows NT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux® is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Apple®, Macintosh®, and MacOS® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Parallels Desktop is a registered trademark of Parallels IP Holdings GmbH.
Hewlett-Packard, JetDirect™, and HP LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
VMWare is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions.
To ensure the efficient fulfillment of Xerox service offerings, we leverage global competency centers and cloud technology. This may result in the personal data we process being transferred beyond the European Economic Area (EEA), but within the parameters of the defined service offering. The level of protection afforded by General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is not undermined through data transfers, and all transfers undertaken by Xerox are carried out in full compliance with GDPR using an approved mechanism and subject to appropriate safeguards.
Changes are periodically made to this document. Changes, technical inaccuracies, and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions.
Revision History
Version Date Description
6.7 October 2022 Added Low Supply Warning and Service Plan Mode to the printer info com- municate to Xerox Services Manager.
6.6 May 2022 Replace Microsoft®.NET framework 4.5.2 replace with 4.8. Added support for Windows Server 2022 and Windows® 11. Explained what synced data could be exlcuded from transmission to Xerox.
6.5 October 2021 Power usage data sent to Xerox Services Manager
6.4 May 2021 Aligned Database Server requirements to read me. Reflect remote disablement and termination capability.
6.3 October 2020 support for SQL Server 2019. Updated Mac requirements and unsupported con- figurations.
6.2 May 2020 Changed CloudDM to CloudFM Updated network traffic for auto update server queries
6.1 October 2019 Added reference to Cloud DM in Auto update.
6.0 May 2019 Support for Windows Server 2019. Remove references to Xerox Print Agent, which is no longer supported. Update branding. Auto upgrade is now set to automatic by default. Ability to re-register device agents in Xerox® Services Manager.
5.6 October 2018 No change
5.5 May 2018 Added note about personal data processing for GDPR. Updated hardware and software requirements, added details about remote snmp v3 discovery, new recovery services.
Version Date Description
5.4 May 2017 Updated supported browsers
5.3 February 2016 Updates supported hardware and software requirements. Added support for Macintosh environments.
5.2 June 2015 Updated recommended hardware and software requirements
Table of Contents
Overview and How to Use this Guide 2
Goals and Objectives 2
Intended Audience 2
Using This Guide 2
Limits to this Guide 3
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent 4
Product Overview 4
Deployment Requirements 4
Xerox Device Agent System Component Architecture 5
Recommended Hardware and Operating System Requirements 6
Requirements to Run on a Macintosh Operating System 7
Unsupported Configurations 7
Database Requirements 7
Browser Requirements 8
Printer Requirements 8
Network Printer Discovery/Monitoring Requirements 8
Direct Printer Requirements 8
Security 9
Application 9
Install 9
Licensing 9
Post Install Normal Operation 10
Network Printer 10
SNMP v1-v2 Security 10
SNMP v3 Security 10
Xerox Back Office Integration 11
Device Information Communicated to Xerox 12
Xerox Device Agent Site Information Sent to Xerox 13
Xerox Services Manager Initiated Remote Commands to Xerox Device Agent 13
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide i
Xerox Device Agent Remote Configuration 14
Remote Disablement and Termination 14
Corporation Security Mode 14
Network Impact 16
Discovery 16
Device Discovery Method 17
IP Sweep Operation 17
Discover SNMP v3 Devices 18
Queue-based Discovery 19
Managing Discovery 19
Discovery Network Data Calculations 19 Manufacturer Applicability 21
Recovery Services to Monitor for Errors 21
Running Recovery Services 21
Disabling Recovery Services Automatic Upload 22
Xerox Services Manager Integration 22
Registration 23
Device List Import 23
Site Settings Export 23
Site Settings Import 23
Site Status Export 23
Device Information Export 23
Remote Command Check 24
Auto Update 24
Version Check 24
Update Download 24
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide ii
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 1
Overview and How to Use this Guide
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 2
Overview and How to Use this Guide
Goals and Objectives
Network and data security are one of the many challenges that businesses face on a daily basis. Recognizing this, Xerox continues to engineer and design all of its products to ensure the highest level of security possible.
This document provides additional background on the Xerox® Device Agent software capabilities, and specifically focuses on the software’s security aspects. This document covers all Xerox Device Agent configurations, and some items may not apply to the version you have. This document will help you better understand how the application functions and will help you feel confident that it transmits device data in a secure and accurate manner. This guide will help you certify, evaluate, and approve the deployment of Xerox Device Agent in support of your contract. It includes information on the application's potential impact on security and network infrastructure as well as calculations of theoretical network traffic.
We recommend that you read this document in its entirety and take appropriate actions consistent with your information technology security policies and practices. You have many issues to consider in developing and deploying a security policy within your organization. Since these requirements will vary from customer to customer, you have the final responsibility for all implementations, re-installations, and testing of security configurations, patches, and modifications.
Intended Audience
It is expected that this guide will be used by your network administrator before installing Xerox Device Agent. In order to get the most from this guide, you should have an understanding of:
l the network environment where you will install Xerox Device Agent,
l any restrictions placed on applications that are deployed on that network, and
l the Microsoft Windows® operating system
Using This Guide
There are two main scenarios for using this guide: if you are a customer who does not have acceptance and evaluation procedures for this type of software or if you are a customer who has defined guidelines. In both cases, the three identified areas of concern are security, impact to the network infrastructure, and what other resources might be required to install, use, and support Xerox Device Agent.
Use this guide to gather information about these areas and determine if you need to investigate Xerox Device Agent further. This document is divided into these areas:
l This overview
l An introduction to Xerox Device Agent
l Potential security-related impacts to a typical customer environment including:
Overview and How to Use this Guide
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 3
l Security information, implications, and recommendations
l Roles and permission requirements of Xerox Device Agent users
l Information about features that impact the network, which may include estimates of generated traffic, changes to the network infrastructure, or other required resources.
Limits to this Guide
This guide is meant to help you evaluate this application, but it cannot be a complete information source for all potential customers. This guide proposes a hypothetical customer printer environment; if your network environment differs from the hypothetical environment, your network administration team and Xerox Support Representative must understand the differences and decide on any certification modifications and/or future steps. Additionally:
l This guide only describes those features within the application that have some discernable impact to the overall customer network environment, whether it be the overall network, security, or other customer resources.
l The guide’s information is related to the application's current release. Although much of this information will remain constant through the software’s life cycle, some of the data is revision-specific, and will be revised periodically. IT organizations should check with the Xerox Support Representative to obtain the appropriate version.
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 4
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Product Overview
Xerox Device Agent discovers and monitors printing devices, specifically office printers and multi-function devices.
The application features a built-in alert detection system and has the capability to send an e-mail message to an appropriate user when certain conditions exist in the monitored devices. It also provides clear and concise status of all networked printers.
You can do the following from Xerox Device Agent:
l Discover printers
l Notify users via e-mail when faults occur
l Monitor printers for status and alert conditions
The application supports industry-SNMP MIBs for network printers; however, the amount and type of management that it can provide is dependent on the printer’s level of conformance to those standards. The following features conform to these standards:
l Printer identity (i.e. model, serial number, manufacturer, etc.)
l Printer properties (i.e. input trays, output bins, serial number, etc.)
l TCP/IP protocol suite (SNMP, TCP, UDP, IP, NIC details)
l Supported print protocols (LPD, HTTP, Port 9100)
l Consumables and levels (toner, fuser, print cartridge and device unique parts)
l Printer status including overall state, detailed status, UI messages, etc.
Note: A single instance of Xerox Device Agent supports a maximum of 2000 network print devices. Consumers with more than 2000 network print devices will install an additional instance of the application on a different server or PC to support the remaining networked print devices.
Deployment Requirements
To deploy the application install it on a desktop computer or server that has internet access and shares the network with those printers that you want to monitor.
Note: The scheduled events for meter reads and alert activity may be affected by the software's connectivity.
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 5
Xerox Device Agent System Component Architecture
This diagram shows a typical configuration that a customer may deploy within their network. In this example, Xerox Device Agent runs on a networked computer that can access the printers through the local network.
Figure 1: Typical Xerox Device Agent Deployment
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 6
Recommended Hardware and Operating System Requirements
Item Requirement
Operating Sys- tem (32-bit and 64-bit)
l Windows Server® 2012 and 2012 R2
l Windows Server® 2016
l Windows Server® 2019
l Windows Server® 2022
l Windows® 8.1
l Windows® 10 Professional, Enterprise, Home
l Windows® 11
l Apple® OS 10.9.4 or later when run with the Parallels® Desktop hardware emulation software. Go to the Requirements to Run on a Macintosh Operating System section for requirement details.
l Microsoft®.NET framework 4.8 Extended (Full Version) installed
Database Server l SQL Server® Compact Edition
l SQL Server® 2012 SP4
l SQL Server® 2014 SP3
l SQL Server® 2016 SP2
l SQL Server® 2017
l SQL Server® 2019
l The software includes Microsoft SQL Server® Compact Edition for operation.
Memory l Windows® 8.1, Windows® 10, Windows® 11, Windows Server® 2012, Windows Server® 2012 R2, Windows Server® 2016, Windows Server® 2019: 2 GB of RAM (2.5 GB or higher recom- mended)
Processor l 1.7 GHz processor or better
Hard Disk l Minimum free space is 450 MB
Minimum Res- olution
l 1024 x 768
Permissions l You must install the application software on the client computer using the administrative account or an account with administrative privileges.
Internet Con- nection
l Required
Notes:
l We recommend that you update your host computers with the latest critical patches and service releases from Microsoft Corporation.
l The Network Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) must be loaded and operational.
l Requires SNMP-enabled devices and the ability to route SNMP over the network. It is not required to enable SNMP on the computer where the application will be installed or any other network computers.
l You must install Microsoft®.NET framework 4.8 Extended (Full version) before you install the application.
l The application should not be installed on a PC where other SNMP-based applications or other Xerox printer management tools are installed, since they may interfere with each other's operation.
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 7
Requirements to Run on a Macintosh Operating System
This table lists the system requirements that you must meet to run Xerox Device Agent in a Macintosh envir- onment. You can only run Xerox Device Agent in a Macintosh environment by using hardware emulation software. You cannot run Xerox Device Agent in a native Macintosh environment.
Item Requirement
Apple Mac Hardware l Intel Core 2 Duo, Core i3, Core i5, Core i7, or Xeon processor
Host Operating System for Apple Mac Plat- forms
l Apple OS 10.9.4 or later
Hardware Emulation Software l Parallels Desktop v10.2.1 or later required for Apple OS X 10.9 “Mav- ericks” – 10.10.x “Yosemite” host systems
l Parallels Desktop v11.0.1 or later required for Apple OS X 10.11 “El Capitan host system
Support Guest Windows Operating Sys- tems Running a Parallels Desktop (32 and 64-bit)
l Windows® 8.1, and 8.1 update (64-bit only for update 1)
l Windows® 10
l Windows® 11
Additional Software l Microsoft®.NET framework 4.8 installed
Memory l 2 GB for all Windows applications
Hard Disk l Minimum free space is 600 MB (100 MB for Xerox® Device Agent and up to 500 MB for the Microsoft®.NET framework, if not pre- viously installed.)
l An additional 850 MB of disk space on the boot volume (Macintosh HD) for Parallels Desktop installation
Unsupported Configurations
l Installation of the application on a computer with another Xerox device management application, such as Xerox® Device Manager.
l Installation of the application on a computer with other SNMP management tools,
l Native Mac OS® operating system software (i.e., Xerox® Device Agent can only run on the Apple Mac Platform when the Parallels Emulation Software is installed.)
l Any version of UNIX® operating systems, Linux® operating systems, Windows systems running the Nov- ell client, Windows® 7, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows Media® Center, Win- dows® 2000, Windows® Server 2008, Windows® Server 2008 R2, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® 8 RT, Operating systems running Terminal Services for applications and Installation on Windows systems running domain controllers.
l This application has only been tested on VMware® Lab Manager™/Workstation environments. This application may work on other virtual environments; however, these environments have not been tested
Database Requirements
Xerox Device Agent installs Microsoft SQL Server® Compact 4.0 database engine and database files that store printer data and application settings within the installation directory. No additional licensing is required by the customer for the installation of this software product. Xerox Device Agent also supports existing instances of SQL Server, as described above.
Introduction to Xerox Device Agent
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 8
Browser Requirements
Although Xerox Device Agent is a Windows application that does not require a Web browser, when accessing back office systems that may be web-based (e.g., Xerox® Services Manager) a Web browser may be required.
Printer Requirements
Network Printer Discovery/Monitoring Requirements
For successful management by the application, all SNMP-based printer devices should support the mandatory MIB elements and groups as defined by the following standards:
l RFC 1157 (SNMP Version 1)
l RFC 1213 (MIB-II for TCP/IP-based Internet)
l RFC 2790 (Host Resources MIB v1/v2)
l RFC 1759 (Printer MIB v 1)
l RFC 3805 (Printer MIB v 2)
l RFC 3806 (Printer Finishing MIB)
Direct Printer Requirements
Queue-based discovery depends on user permissions on domain and/or across computers, NetBIOS File and Printer Sharing, Network Discovery, and WMI.
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 9
Security
Since security is an important consideration when evaluating tools of this class, this section provides information about the security methods used by Xerox Device Agent.
Application
The application is compatible with the security features built into the Windows® operating systems. It relies on a background Windows service running under the local system account credentials to enable proactive monitoring of printers, gathering of data, and submission to Xerox Services Manager. The user interface that displays the gathered data is accessible only to the power users and administrators who have login access to the Windows operating system.
Install
The installer requires administrator privileges. The Windows service, “Xerox Device Agent Service” is installed and configured to run under the local system Windows account. No special system level configuration change is required or made by the installer. Xerox Device Agent is compatible with the security features built into the Windows operating system including:
l User authentication and authorization
l Group policy deployment and management
l Internet Connection Firewall (ICF) including:
- Security logging settings
- ICMP settings
Note: Make sure that the PC or server that is running Xerox Device Agent is continuously powered on during core business hours to prevent interruption of automatic communications between Xerox Device Agent and Xerox.
Licensing
The customer must accept the End User License Agreement (EULA) that is presented upon Xerox Device Agent installation. No additional licensing is required by the customer for installation of the Microsoft SQL Server® Compact 4 database.
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services. To successfully operate Xerox® Device Agent, you must have a Xerox services contract and an account on Xerox Services Manager. During the software configuration process, you will need to pair Xerox Device Agent with an Xerox Services Manager account in order to activate Xerox Device Agent. For this reason, you are required to use a Xerox® Services Manager registration key supplied by Xerox or your service provider. Depending on your account, you may also be required to use a secondary registration key.
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 10
Post Install Normal Operation
The Xerox Device Agent Windows service runs as a background process even when no user is logged in. This enables the application to monitor the devices on the network and generate alerts proactively. If you are a power user or an administrator authenticated by Windows and you log in to the system, then you have access to the Xerox Device Agent’s user interface. You can monitor the printers, view printer data, and change settings. The application's user interface verifies that you are a power user or you have administrative privilege as you attempt to run the application. If you are not an administrator or power user, the application will display a message that states you need administrative privileges in order to run the application.
Network Printer
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the most widely-used-network-management tool for communication between network management systems and the networked printers. The application utilizes SNMP during discovery operations to retrieve detailed data from output devices detected on the network. After discovery, SNMP is used to monitor printers for alerts, changes in status, configuration changes, and to support printer troubleshooting. Xerox Device Agent supports SNMP version 1\2 and version 3 protocols. The following application properties will help you better understand the impact to printer security:
l it does not modify the settings on the printer; it only reads them.
l it does not register for SNMP traps.
Exception: Honeywell devices can register for traps.
l it does allow the printer to be reset (this requires that devices support printer reset via SNMP).
SNMP v1-v2 Security
In its current form, SNMP's security is limited to three methods of access: read-only, write-only, and read- write. Access from Xerox Device Agent to the devices is granted by the use of community name strings. Although usually referred to as the password, for SNMP operations, the community name provides a very simple level of authentication for all Protocol Data Unit (PDU) operations. Theoretically, you can assign community names to every subnet on a network. Every printer on a local subnet will have the same community name. You can assign printers on a different subnet to a different community name. By default, Xerox Device Agent uses the community name string of public, which is the printer manufacturer’s default setting. You can elect to change this setting on the printers and you have the ability to change the community name string that Xerox Device Agent uses to match the settings for the configured printers.
SNMP v3 Security
The SNMP V3 framework supports multiple security models, which can exist simultaneously within an SNMP entity. Messages in SNMP V3 contain a field in the header that identifies which security model must process them. To ensure some form of interoperability, a User-based Security Model (USM) is implemented to defend against unauthorized modification of managed elements and spoofing. Although SNMP V3 is a huge step forward in secure manageability, it cannot prevent denial-of-service attacks. In addition, its secur- ity system must stand alone, meaning every device must have a database of users/passwords. In com- panies that do not support a standalone security system all devices are left at risk.
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 11
Xerox Back Office Integration
The application communicates with Xerox Services Manager and our billing and automated supply systems on a periodic basis. It is important to recognize that Xerox Services Manager is hosted in an ISO 27001- compliant facility. The data exchanged during such communications is compressed and encrypted. The security of this communication is protected by several mechanisms.
l You must configure Xerox Device Agent with a valid account registration key, which is provided by a Xerox representative.
l The Xerox Device Agent to Xerox infrastructure communication method is further secured by the use of industry-standard, secure HTTPS, which is HTTP using a Secure Socket Layer (SSL).
l Xerox Device Agent initiates all contact with Xerox and no special firewall configuration on the site is required to enable communication.
l Xerox Device Agent will require a valid proxy if one is required for Internet communication.
l The Xerox Services Manager data store and administrative services sit behind a secure firewall and is not accessible from the Internet.
l Xerox Services Manager user interface access requires authentication. Xerox Device Agent information is stored in an account specific to the customer site. Access to that account data in Xerox Services Man- ager is restricted to the Xerox Services Manager account managers.
l Here is the list of top-level items exchanged during periodic communication with Xerox and their fre- quency:
- Printer Data Export: Default once per day. User configurable via Synchronize settings.
- List Import: Default once per day. User configurable via Synchronize settings.
- Site Status Export: Default once per day. User configurable via Synchronize settings.
- Site Settings Import: Default once per day. User configurable via Synchronize settings.
- Check for a remote command: User configurable via Synchronize settings. The data traffic generated from this check is negligible. (See the Network Impact section for more information).
l Here is the list of top-level items exchanged on an as-needed basis:
- Site Settings Export: Every time the settings are changed.
- Commands and settings from Xerox Services Manager.
- Export of printers on request from Xerox Services Manager via Remote Command.
l All communication instances are logged and can be viewed either in the Settings>Log screen or in the PC’s Xerox DM (Device Management) event log.
l Xerox Device Agent includes a small background service that queries the Auto Update Service hosted by Xerox to see if the Device Agent’s associated Xerox Service Manager account has been linked to a Xerox®Workplace Cloud account. If the account is linked, then the Xerox Device Agent will then call the Xerox Workplace Cloud to download the Cloud Agent installer. Communication between the Device Agent and the Auto Update Service is via HTTPS (port 443).
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 12
Device Information Communicated to Xerox
The data that is sent to Xerox is printer-specific, which is primarily billing counters, supply levels, and printer alerts. Here is the list of printer fields or multi-function device (MFD) attributes published by Xerox Device Agent:
Printer Data
2-Sided Percentage Advanced Finishing Sup- ported
Advanced Status Update Date
Analog Fax Capable
Alerts Comment Port Workstation
Analog Fax Description Analog Fax Modem Installed
Analog Fax Phone Num- ber
Black Rated PPM
Can Manage Color Capable Color Rated PPM Compliance Level
Console Country Console Language Customer Asset Number Device Time Zone
IP Default Gateway Description Device Language DNS Name
Discovery Date Discovery Method Discovery Type Hard Disk Present
Duplex Capable Fax Status Finishing Options Firmware Level
Hard Disk Size MB IP Address Changed IP Address (Device) Icon
Last Known IP Address Last Status Attempt Location MAC Address (Device)
Machine Up Time Status Managed State Manufacturer (Device)
Marking Technology (Device)
Marking Technology Manage Request Date MIB Country
Model Physical Memory Total MB
Queue Name Scan to File Capable
Scan to Internet Fax Capable
Scan to Server Fax Cap- able
Scan to E-Mail Capable Scanner Description
Scanner Installed Scanner Status Serial Number (Device) Serial Number Scrubbed
Services Supported Status Date Subnet Address Subnet Mask
Supplies (Paper Trays, Output Bins, Finisher, Imaging)
System Contact System Name Traps Supported
Target Volume Traps Enabled Type Update Date
Utilization Percentage Xerox Asset Number Usage Counters Usage Meters in kWh
Timeout Data Cumulative Tme in State Low Supply Warning Service Plan Mode
Table 1: Printer Data Communicated to Xerox
You have the option to exclude certain data from the synchronization with Xerox Services Manager. Go to Synchronize > Data and opt to change the settings. The following fields may be excluded:
l IP Address
l IPv4 Address
l IPv4 Subnet Address
l IPv4 Default Gateway
l Last Known IPv4 Address
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 13
l IPv6 Address
l IPv6 Prefix Length
l Last Known IPv6 Address
l DNS Name
l MAC Address
l Queue Name
l System Name
l Printer Location
l System Contact
l Analog Fax Phone Number
l Customer Asset Number
Xerox Device Agent Site Information Sent to Xerox
This table lists the attributes published to Xerox at predetermined intervals. The attributes only relate to the server or PC on which the application is installed. With the exception of administrator contact information, no Personal Identifiable Information (PII) nor business intellectual data is ever transmitted to Xerox.
Note: This information is a subset of what is collected during the registration process.
Site Information
Xerox Device Agent machine DNS name
Xerox Device Agent machine IP address
Xerox Device Agent site name
Xerox Device Agent soft- ware build version
Number of In Scope printers
Number of Out Of Scope printers
Xerox Device Agent data- base size (in MB)
Xerox Device Agent dis- covery database size (in MB)
Operating system name Operating system type (32-bit or 64-bit)
Processor Hard disk size / free space
Memory Size / available Time Zone Discovery Version Discovered Device Count
.Net Framework version
Table 2: Xerox Device Agent Site Information Sent to Xerox
Xerox Services Manager Initiated Remote Commands to Xerox Device Agent
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services.
The Remote commands capability allows account administrators within Xerox Services Manager or Xerox Operations Center personnel (depending upon contract specifications) to request Xerox Device Agent to execute a number of commands on behalf of Xerox Services Manager. Xerox Services Manager does not tunnel into a customer’s IT network firewall. Xerox Device Agent periodically polls its corresponding account within Xerox Services Manager to see if the account administrator has posted a command request to Xerox Device Agent. This polling is a Web interface interrogation by Xerox Device Agent. The network bandwidth loading for the customer’s IT network is a function of the performed operation. Once the command request has been fetched from Xerox Services Manager and executed by Xerox Device Agent, any operations results will be sent back to the Xerox Services Manager server for the account manager to review.
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 14
Default frequency for remote command check is one minute. Xerox Services Manager can be used to configure the remote command check polling interval. When it is configured for instant remote commands, Xerox Device Agent will make an immediate connection to Xerox Services Manager for remote commands, and the session will be left open until a command is posted or the session times out. When a command is posted, Xerox Device Agent will execute the command and return to Xerox Services Manager with the results, and then reopen a new session. If there is a timeout, a new session will be established with Xerox Services Manager within 60 seconds. In this configuration, we can get real-time responses to commands, reducing the time those operations centers wait for information.
Xerox Device Agent Remote Configuration
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services. Xerox Device Agent supplies device information to, and requests remote commands from, Xerox Services Manager. This ability to query Xerox® Services Manager for commands allows you to modify some of the application's settings remotely. It is important to recognize the fact that Xerox Services Manager does not push commands to Xerox Device Agent; rather, this information is queued and Xerox Device Agent will poll Xerox Services Manager for it. You can configure the polling interval in Xerox Device Agent.
Settings Description
Device Discovery Xerox Services Manager can issue a request to Xerox Device Agent for a specific IP Sweep discovery, which can include individual DNS or IP addresses, IP address ranges, and lists of subnets. The definition for the IP Sweep specified by Xerox Services Manager is stored locally within Xerox Device Agent’s built-in Xerox Services Manager Sweep. Using the results of this sweep, Xerox® Device Agent will auto- matically upload any new discovered printer information and a results summary, so that the Xerox Services Manager account manager can review it.
Data Export Within Xerox Services Manager, you can configure when the devices are exported to Xerox Services Manager.
Network You can use Xerox Services Manager to change the default number of retries and timeout for printer communication, how often to retrieve status from both managed and unmanaged printers, and the SNMP “SET” and “GET” community strings names that are used when communicating with a printer.
Auto Update Within Xerox Services Manager, you can configure when Xerox Device Agent checks for updates and the Update Preference setting (Automatic, Prompt or Never).
Table 5: Remote Configuration
Remote Disablement and Termination
As an offering or account relationship changes in the course of doing business, a deployment of Xerox Device Agent may need to be disabled or terminated. This prevents unlicensed use of Xerox software as well as unnecessary network traffic into Xerox® Services Manager. These settings are managed in Xerox Services Manager.
Corporation Security Mode
Within the Synchronize>Change Settings feature, there is a configuration item for Corporation Security Mode. The two modes that exist are Normal and Locked Down. In Normal mode, Xerox® Device Agent
Security
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 15
contacts Xerox® Services Manager daily. Settings can be remotely changed without the need for on-site visits, even when the polling schedules are switched off. In Locked Down mode, besides printer-related data synchronization, there is no communication with Xerox® Services Manager and settings have to be changed on-site. Additionally, the Xerox® Device Agent machine and printer’s IP addresses are not reported to Xerox® Services Manager.
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 16
Network Impact
Company network guidelines will typically enable or disable specific network ports on routers and/or servers. Your IT department will mostly be concerned with the ports used by the application for outgoing traffic. Disablement of specific ports may impact the application's functionality. Refer to the table below for specific ports used by the application's processes. If the application is required to scan across multiple network segments or subnets, routers must allow the protocols associated with these port numbers.
Port Number Port Name In/Outbound Comment
161 (typical) SNMP Out1 Network printer discovery, retrieve device cap- abilities/status/usage counters, single device con- figuration
25 SMTP Out3 E-mail alerts
135 RPC Out1 Windows Remote Procedure Calls (RPC)
80 (typical) HTTP Out1 Get printer image and link to the printer’s webpage Note: If HTTPS is enabled, 443 port is used.
443 HTTPS Out2 Secure Xerox Device Agent-to-Host Xerox® Services Manager data transfer, Auto Upgrade
515, 9100, 2000, 2105
TCP/IP Out1 Troubleshoot, Print Test Page, Printer Upgrade
n/a ICMP (ping) Out1 Network Printer Discovery, Troubleshoot
53 DNS Out1 Default port used for DNS-based device searches.
Table 6: Xerox Device Agent Ports
1 Communication within the Xerox Device Agent installed local network.
2 Communication outside the Xerox Device Agent installed local network.
3 Communication location depends on configuration.
For example, if the ping requests cannot be routed through the environment between the Xerox Device Agent machine and the printers managed by Xerox Device Agent, the following features will not function or will show significant performance degradation:
l Troubleshoot Printers
l Network Printer Discovery
Discovery
The discovery function allows the application to search for network printers on a customer’s intranet. Printer discovery is a crucial part of the application because it is the main method to identify networked-connected devices and store them in the local database. It involves the generation and querying of network addresses (via SNMP) for printer type and general configuration information. Since this operation uses the network resources, you should consider what you want to detect and then configure the discovery to achieve this
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 17
goal with a minimum of network contention. If there are specific addresses that should not be scanned, they can be entered into an exclusion list and Xerox® Device Agent will not try to contact those addresses.
Device Discovery Method
After you install the application onto a networked computer, select what subnet(s) to scan (default is local subnet), and the application will begin to automatically discover network printers according to these settings. Depending upon network configuration, this initial discovery could identify all of the network printers within the customer’s environment. A method known as IP Sweep is used to perform this local subnet network printer discovery. The application also allows the network administrator to perform the discovery beyond the local subnet. For this purpose, the network administrator can specify individual IP addresses or DNS addresses of the printers, a range of addresses, or subnets that will be searched.
Note: As a rule of thumb, each discovered printer might generate as much as 50 KB (maximum) of network message traffic including device capabilities, usage counters, and an alert table.
IP Sweep Operation
IP Sweep Discovery method is the preferred method of accurately discovering printers on a network. A packet is sent to every IP address in the user-defined address or address range list. The address list should be known and provided before running the discovery.
Specifically:
l A single packet is sent to each IP address contained within each subnet or address range defined within the current IP address for the current IP Sweep. In this packet, Xerox® Device Agent requests a value for a single SNMP-based RFC 1213 Object Identifier (OID).
l For each device that responds to the RFC 1213 OID, Xerox® Device Agent will add the IP address of the response packet into its list of live IP addresses.
l Xerox® Device Agent then queries those devices with live IP addresses for two more OIDs: one RFC 1213 OID and one RFC 3805 OID. This enables Xerox® Device Agent to identify printing devices from non- printing devices. Both groups of devices are stored within the Xerox® Device Agent database, however, only printing devices are exposed via the Xerox® Device AgentUI.
- For those printer devices that respond to the RFC 3805 OID query, Xerox® Device Agent flags them as printers.
- For those devices that do not respond to the RFC 3805 OID query, Xerox® Device Agent then checks an RFC 1213 OID value against database values to determine if the device is in fact a known printer. This is necessary because some printing devices (i.e. printers using external print server boxes, older printers, etc.) do not support RFC 3805 – the Printer MIB.
l The database contains RFC 1213 values for several known supported and unsupported printers.
l Xerox® Device Agent then queries all live IP addresses for three RFC 1213 OIDs and one RFC 2790 OID.
l For those devices identified as printers, Xerox® Device Agent queries three more RFC 2790 OIDs and four more RFC 3805 OIDs to obtain some basic attributes of the printer.
l Based upon the identity of each printing device, Xerox® Device Agent then queries the appropriate vendor-specific OID and an OID from the Printer MIB in order to obtain the printer’s serial number.
l Xerox® Device Agent then queries 3 RFC 3805 OIDs in order to display the printing device’s rated speed in pages per minute (PPM).
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 18
l Based upon the identity of each printing device, Xerox® Device Agent then queries the appropriate OID (s) to obtain the printing device’s software/firmware level.
Network Impact
The amount of network traffic generated by a sweep-based discovery is minimized because the requests are directed to specific IP addresses.
Accuracy
The IP Sweep method produces a controlled and orderly flow of data between the printers and the server, reducing network packet collisions that can introduce errors in the printer information.
Discover SNMP v3 Devices
As accounts become more security-conscious, some of them are deciding to enable SNMP v3. Xerox Device Agent can discover and manage these devices. To discover SNMP V3 devices, use one of two authentication modes as well as a set of keys or passwords. It is important to understand what the device settings are before setting up a SNMP v3 Discovery.
For SNMP V3 sweeps, you have the option to manage device discovery remotely through Xerox Services Manager. The discovery method settings are synchronized on both sides during every import and export. The process to run SNMP V3 discovery remotely is documented in the Xerox Services Manager guides.
During a sync, Xerox Device Agent will download the discovery settings from Xerox Services Manager if there is any change in the settings. Any updates in Xerox Device Agent will be synchronized in Xerox Services Manager during the next sync.
To Discover SNMP V3 Devices:
1. In the Search Setting dialog box, select Specified Search. 2. In the Printer Search section, select the SNMP v3 button on the top. 3. Select Search Type > Import. (This is the only supported option for SNMP v3 searches.)
Note: To download a sample CSV file, select Export Template and add the relevant SNMP V3 data in the file. If you need directions on how to format the CSV file, select the instruction link to display a dialog box showing the possible format for the rows in the CSV file or see the directions below.
4. When you are ready to import the CSV file containing the discovery settings, click Select File, and then browse to and select choose the file.
5. Click OK to import the settings.
CSV File Format Overview:
The bullets below explain the fields within the CSV file.
Note: It is important that the fields be listed in the same order as below.
l DNS Name: If using the DNS name to discover the printer then enter its name here.
l IP Address: If using the IP Address to discover the printer then enter it here.
l Start IP Address: When doing a range of IP addresses this is the start address of the range.
l End IP Address: When doing a range of IP addresses this is the end address of the range.
l Subnet Mask: The subnet mask for the subnet the printer is on and must be filled in.
l "Comment": An optional comment.
l Prefix: The IP v6 prefix for the device.
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 19
l User Name: This is the SNMP v3 user name and can be found on the SNMP v3 page on the printer. Most Xerox devices use Xadmin for this value.
l Context Name: This is the SNMP v3 context name and can be found on the SNMP v3 page on the printer. Note: Not all printers use this, so if it is not found on the Printer’s SNMP V3 page leave this value blank.
l Authentication Mode: This is how to authenticate to the device and will be MD5 or SHA1. If the printer doesn’t allow this to be changed it will be displayed on the printers SNMP v3 page.
l Authentication Type: This field will be the word “password” or “key”. If on the device it asks you to enter an Authentication Password and Privacy Password then put “password” in this field.
l Authentication Key/Password: This is the same information that you entered in the Authentication field on the printer and is case sensitive.
l Privacy Key/Password: This is the same information that you entered in the Privacy field on the printer and is case sensitive.
Queue-based Discovery
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services. Queue-based discovery is used to identify directly connected printers. Only information available on the queue is detected and reflected within the application. Proper network administrator credentials or the credentials of the computers with direct printers are necessary to obtain access to the queues.
Managing Discovery
The discovery process can be managed in a number of ways.
l The discovery schedule is configurable. The IP addresses, DNS addresses, and subnets are configurable.
l It can be controlled by the use of SNMP community name strings to query certain network printers over others.
l The discovery will provide active status on its progress.
l Device timeout and retry parameters are pre-defined with a setting of five seconds for attempt timeout and one retry allowed to get print information from slower network subnets on a customer’s network. You can modify this information on the Advanced Settings screen.
Discovery Network Data Calculations
As mentioned earlier, each discovered printer could create as much as 50KB of discovery-based traffic. IP Sweep discovery sweeps all of the addresses in the ranges supplied.
Device Discovery Data Set Magnitudes On Typical Printers
The amount of data transferred during an operation, such as discovery or status polling, is a function of the device’s capabilities. Measurements made on typical devices show the variability of these parameters. It is highly unlikely that any one network would be populated with only one device type. Instead, the typical case is a variety of devices that are dependent upon the particular needs of individuals or groups on the network. Here are three printer examples to demonstrate the variability in both the amount of collected data and the data transfer rate for typical devices.
Machine Model Discovery Status Polling
Xerox®WorkCentre® Pro 245 49.2 KB 19 KB
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 20
Machine Model Discovery Status Polling
Xerox® Phaser® 8560 DN 15.3 KB 14 KB
HP LaserJet 4345 MFP 29.1 KB 6 KB
Average 31 KB 13 KB
Data Sizes
You also need to consider the frequency at which you will perform these operations. For purposes of this document, the following schedule for device data retrieval and their data set size will be assumed to be:
Operation Type Frequency Average Data Set Size
Discovery Weekly 31 KB
Status Polling Hourly 13 KB
Data Gathering Frequencies
Assuming that Xerox Device Agent will discover and monitor a thousand network devices on the network and each device discovery data set size is 31 KB and its status polling data set size is approximately 13 KB, this set of devices is expected to retrieve the following printer-based discovery data over the network each month
l 4 discovery cycles/month x 1,000 printers x 31 KB/printer (Discovery data set size) is approximately 124 MB/month
Network Impact Considerations Of Status Polling
Xerox® Device Agent communicates with the printers under management regularly. Each transaction consists of a series of SNMP queries with the device, first checking for a response, then progressively asking for more information until the transaction purpose is complete.
Status polling assumptions:
l Status polling traffic averages 13 KB per transmission
l Status polling occurs every day, once per hour (24x7)
l 1000 printers are being monitored
The expected amount of data to be retrieved from this set of devices over the network for printer-based discovery over one month is:
l 1000 printers x 24 hours x 30 days x 13 KB is approximately 9.4 GB per month
Total Xerox Device Agent Data Transfer Calculations
The next traffic calculation example shows totals for an exaggerated network data transfer size during a one-month period. The total includes the use of regularly scheduled discovery and status polling.
The calculation is inflated to show an above-the-limits traffic estimate. It assumes that every network printer discovery requires:
l 50 KB of traffic to complete (except non-printer discovery),
l 19 KB for status, and
l The organization is active 30 days per month in order to demonstrate the extreme upper limits for a net- work with 1,000 print devices being monitored monthly.
Discovery Total
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 21
4 cycles/month x 1,000 printers x 50 KB/printer = 200,000 KB ≈ 0.19 GB/month
Discovery Traffic to Non-print Devices during a Sweep
4 cycles/month x 65,534 IP Address x 1 KB/printer = 262,136 KB ≈ 0.25 GB/month
Status Polling Total
30 days x 24 polls/day x 1,000 printers x 19 KB/printer = 13,680,000 KB/month ≈ 13 GB/month
Overall (Exaggerated) Total
0.19 GB + 0.25 GB + 13 GB ≈ 13.44 GB/month
Manufacturer Applicability
You can configure Xerox® Device Agent to support only Xerox® network printers (Xerox and Fuji Xerox) or all printers (any discoverable Xerox® or non Xerox® network printer) that communicate via SNMP. This configuration is governed by policies configured in the application. This setting affects non Xerox® printers in three ways: discovery, export of discovered printers to Xerox® Services Manager server, and scheduled export of meters for found printers. When you configure manufacturer applicability, the scheduled device discovery will attempt to find all Xerox® and non Xerox® network printers and will send printer information and meters to Xerox® Services Manager server.
Additionally, the policies configured in Xerox® Services Manager may allow you to change this value within Xerox® Device Agent. If Xerox® Device Agent is configured to allow for this setting change, it may be set to restrict discovery of non Xerox® printers. To do so, manufacturer applicability must be set to Only Xerox®
Network Printers and All Queue Connected Printers.
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services.
Manufacturer Applicability does not apply to directly connected printers. Printers of all manufacturers will be discovered when you use queue-based discovery.
Recovery Services to Monitor for Errors
Xerox Device Agent can monitor for the following error conditions:
l Service has crashed
l Service has locked up
In addition, you can choose what action to take after an error from the following options:
l Restart the service, or
l Do Nothing (if recovery is disabled)
You can create a diagnostic file of the database and log files that will be saved to a location where they will not be overwritten. This ensure that even if the Xerox Device Agent is uninstalled or upgraded enough information is saved to allow Xerox Support be able to determine the cause of an issue. The diagnostic file is sent to an Azure server over HTTPS and contains install logs, event logs and other errors logs from the Xerox® Device Agent/Bin directory.
Running Recovery Services
You can generate a Recovery File of Database and Log files by running a command line utility in the Xerox Device Agent installation /Bin directory. You must be an administrator to run this utility. By default, a
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 22
Recovery File will be generated in a default location and is sent to Xerox.
The following files are uploaded to Xerox in the diagnostic upload:
l Windows Application Event Log
l Discovery Event Log
l Xerox DM (Device Management) Event Log
l Schedule Event Log
l Database Files
l XDA Installer Log
Note:
l Only Xerox Support representatives have access to these diagnostic recovery files.
l Diagnostic recovery files are password protected and transmitted over a secure connection.
l The recovery files are deleted after the problem has been diagnosed.
Disabling Recovery Services Automatic Upload
To disable the automatic upload of log files add the -c switch to the Xerox Device Agent Service in Service and Applications / Services.
1. Double click Xerox Device Agent Service in Service and Applications / Services. 2. Select the Recovery tab. 3. Under Command line parameters, replace the “-r” with “-r -c”.
Xerox Services Manager Integration
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services.
The application communicates directly to Xerox through the Internet, transferring associated printer and device information through a secure Web services transfer mechanism automatically (Refer to the Security section for more information.) Xerox uses this device information to update device status and meter reads. The data exchange between the application and Xerox is compressed to conserve bandwidth.
The interaction with Xerox Services Manager can be broken down into the following categories:
l Data exchange as part of the Startup Wizard
- Registration
- Site status export
- Site settings export
- Device list import
- Export devices that have been newly discovered
l Daily synchronization operation (the frequency is user-configurable)
- Device list import
- Export of devices
- Site status export
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 23
- Site Settings import
l Remote command checks
l Check for commands on Xerox Services Manager
- Process and send results
Registration
Xerox Device Agent is required to register with Xerox Services Manager. This involves a Web service-based transaction in which Xerox Device Agent sends a unique Xerox Device Agent install/site identifier and the Xerox Services Manager registration key. This data packet is negligible (< 2 KB) and is performed only when the Startup Wizard is run to register Xerox Device Agent with Xerox Services Manager.
An Operations Center Administrator can remotely change the registration of a Xerox Device Agent to another account and /or chargeback code in Xerox Services Manager. Xerox Device Agent registrations can be moved between partners within the same Operations Center and even to another Partner Account / CBC in another Operations Center. This function is documented in the Xerox® Services Manager Administrator Guide.
Device List Import
At the end of the Startup Wizard and during the synchronize operation, Xerox® Device Agent imports the list of printers from Xerox® Services Manager. This is a simple transaction with the identifiers for all printers. The data packet is approximately <5 KB for 100 devices.
Site Settings Export
Xerox Device Agent sends its settings to Xerox Services Manager at the end of the Startup Wizard and every time the settings are changed by the user. This includes the discovery settings, synchronization and other schedules, SNMP timeout/retry settings, and SNMP community names. The data size is dependent of the discovery setting, i.e. the number of IP addresses and subnets. This settings packet can be up to 5KB or more in size.
Site Settings Import
Xerox Device Agent imports the site settings stored on Xerox Services Manager as part of the synchronize operation. The data size and the data size variability rules are for the most part the same as that for the Site Settings Export. This import data packet also includes alert profiles.
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services. The count of alert profiles can vary, so the size of this packet can be 5 KB or more.
Site Status Export
Xerox Device Agent sends the site status information to Xerox Services Manager to indicate its health. This includes the application's database size and the count of devices. The data size is approximately 3 KB.
Device Information Export
Xerox Device Agent exports device information to Xerox via Web services. The device information includes device identity information, status information, and usage information. The data packet size is roughly 35 KB per 100 devices.
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 24
Remote Command Check
Note: This section only applies to Xerox® Print Services and Xerox® Partner Print Services. Periodically, Xerox Device Agent will query Xerox Services Manager if there are any remote commands to execute. Remote commands can be requests for status or reboot for example. Complete list of commands is listed in the Security section.
l Data content will be a negligible if there are no commands to execute. If there is a command to execute, then the response information about the Remote Command will be sent to Xerox Services Manager.
l Data size depends on the command and number of commands. Just for the check, the packet size will be approximately 2 KB. For example, a troubleshoot device command will result in a response with a trans- mission size of approximately 9 KB.
l If an Upgrade Device command is queued, Xerox Device Agent will also retrieve the firmware file from Xerox Services Manager. Firmware files can be more than 100 MB.
l Default frequency for the command check is once per minute.
Auto Update
Xerox Device Agent supports automatic update. This is the default setting. When a newer version of Xerox Device Agent is released, it is loaded on the Auto Update Server available for Xerox Device Agent to connect to.
There are two actions that utilize network resources to accomplish the Xerox Device Agent Auto Update function. The two actions include:
l Checking to determine if a newer version of Xerox Device Agent is available for download.
l Downloading a newer version of Xerox Device Agent for installation.
Xerox Device Agent makes changes only on the PC on which it is installed; it does not require network resources like SQL server during the update.
Note: If enabled, automatic updates will also check for CloudFM updates.
Version Check
When Xerox Device Agent queries the Auto Upgrade Server to determine if a newer version of Xerox Device Agent is available for download, ~4.2 K of network traffic is generated. This check is performed once a week at the day and time configured in Xerox Device Agent.
Summary: Monthly total network impact: ~16.8K. Add 4.2K for every time update check is initiated manually.
Update Download
When a newer version of the application is available for download, a composite package of download manager, application installer, and supporting files totaling approximately 30 MB is downloaded to the client machine where the application is currently installed. By default, the auto-upgrade setting is Automatic. Once the download is complete, all installation work is done on the client, and no additional network traffic is generated.
Network Impact
Xerox® Device Agent Security & Evaluation Guide 25
When a Xerox®Workplace Cloud Fleet Management has been licensed and linked to an Xerox Services Man- ager account, the Xerox Device Agent will download files approximately 50 MB in size and install to the cli- ent machine in the application directory. This download will only take place if Xerox®Workplace Cloud Fleet Management has been licensed for the associated account and chargeback code.
Pakkuja: ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing Hankija: Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus
Pakkumuse ID: 438327 Hanke nimetus: Osa 4 - A3 klass 2 printeri_v soetus
Pakkumuse esitamine: 28.07.2023 12:00 Viitenumber: 261480
CPV kood: 30232100-5 TOODETE JA TEENUSTE NIMEKIRI
Nimetus Tootekood Kogus Hind Hind KM-ga
Printer Xerox VersaLink C7130 C7101V_D; 097S05197; 497K23630
tk 1550.00 € 1860.00 €
Täishooldusteenus 48 kuuks TH Xerox C7130 tk 0.00 € 0.00 €
A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja
497K22760, 497K20610
tk 200.00 € 240.00 €
Aluskapp X_097S04907 tk 10.00 € 12.00 €
Printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus garantiiperioodi jooksul
C7130_püsimälu tk 0.00 € 0.00 €
Tootja garantii 3 aastat 3 war_C7130 tk 0.00 € 0.00 €
A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav viimistleja
X097S04847 tk 50.00 € 60.00 €
Printer Xerox VersaLink C7130 rent 48 kuud C7101V_D; 097S05197;
497K23630 rent
tk 528.00 € 633.60 €
Aluskapp rent 48 kuud X_097S04907 rent tk 0.00 € 0.00 €
A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist, sorteerimist ja augustamist võimaldav viimistleja; rent 48 kuud
497K22760, 497K20610_rent
tk 100.00 € 120.00 €
A3 klass 2 printeri klammerdamist ja sorteerimist võimaldav finisher, rent 48 kuud
097S04847_rent1 tk 50.00 € 60.00 €
Täishooldusteenus 48 kuuks; rent 48 kuud TH Xerox C7130 rent
tk 0.00 € 0.00 €
Printeri püsimälu tagastamata jätmise ja iseseisvalt hävitamise õigus garantiiperioodi jooksul; Rent 48 kuud
C7130_püsimälu rent
tk 48.00 € 57.60 €
1
RAAMLEPING NR 5-3/24-0026-1
Raamlepingu sõlmimise
alus
Raamleping sõlmitakse riigihanke „Printerite soetamine täishooldusteenuse
võimalusega (e-kataloog)“ (viitenumber 261480) (edaspidi nimetatud
riigihange) tulemusena.
Pooled Raamleping sõlmitakse Vabariigi Valitsuse 14.04.2022 korralduse nr 119
„Kohustusliku keskse hankija määramine infotehnoloogia valdkonna
riigihangetes“ punktis 1 nimetatud hankijate ja volituse alusel riigihankega
liitunud hankijate (edaspidiselt raamlepingus nimetatud kui tellijad) ning
riigihankes edukaks osutunud pakkujate (edaspidi nimetatud kui täitjad)
vahel, keda nimetatakse edaspidi eraldi pool või koos pooled.
Raamlepingu
eesmärk Raamlepingu eesmärgiks on:
- kehtestada raamlepingu kehtivusaja vältel selle alusel sõlmitavaid
hankelepinguid reguleerivad tingimused;
- määratleda pooltevahelised õigused, kohustused ning vastutus
hankelepingute sõlmimisel;
- kehtestada ühtsed tingimused hankelepingute tõlgendamiseks.
Tellija Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskus
Registrikood 77001613
Aadress Lõõtsa tn 8a, Tallinn, 11415
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Põhimäärus
Tellija AS HOOLEKANDETEENUSED
Registrikood 10399457
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Ettevõtluse ja Innovatsiooni Sihtasutus
Registrikood 90006012
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Harku Vallavalitsus
Registrikood 75014132
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Saue Vallavalitsus
Registrikood 77000430
2 / 11
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Sihtasutus Keskkonnainvesteeringute Keskus
Registrikood 90005946
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija sihtasutus Põhja-Eesti Regionaalhaigla
Registrikood 90006399
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija sihtasutus Tartu Ülikooli Kliinikum
Registrikood 90001478
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Tallinna Strateegiakeskus
Registrikood 75023817
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Tallinna Tehnikaülikool
Registrikood 74000323
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Tallinna Ülikool
Registrikood 74000122
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Tellija Viljandi Vallavalitsus
Registrikood 75038606
Tellija esindaja Ergo Tars
Esinduse alus Volikiri
Täitja ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing
Registrikood 10672508
3 / 11
Aadress Harju maakond, Tallinn, Mustamäe linnaosa, Laki tn 30, 12915
Täitja esindaja René Randrüüt
Esinduse alus Juhatuse liige
1. Raamlepingu ese ja dokumendid
1.1. Raamlepingu esemeks on printerite ja nende kasutamisega seotud lisatoodete (edaspidi nimetatud
printerid või asjad) ostmine ja/või rentimine ning lisateenuste tellimine. Kõikidele ostetavatele
ja/või renditavatele printeritele saab tellija sellekohase soovi korral tellida tootja
originaalkulutarvikut sisaldava täishooldusteenuse paketi (edaspidi nimetatud täishooldusteenus).
Täishooldusteenuse tellimine renditud asjadele on kohustuslik. Üldised nõuded hankelepingu
täitmisele on sätestatud hankelepingu üldtingimustes ja hanke eseme tehnilises kirjelduses (lisa 1
(Osa 4 tehniline kirjeldus)).
1.2. Raamleping koosneb lepingu põhiosast ja selle lisadest. Raamlepinguga samaaegselt
allkirjastatavad lisad on:
1.2.1. Lisa 1 Tehniline kirjeldus;
1.2.2. Lisa 2 Hankelepingu üldtingimused;
1.2.3. Lisa 3 Hankelepingu eritingimused;
1.2.4. Lisa 4 Pakkumus.
1.3. Raamlepingu lahutamatuks osaks on ka riigihankes esitatud pakkumused, sh riigihanke
dokumentatsioon. (vt riigihangete registrist link: https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-
web/#/procurement/5619440/general-info )
2. Kinnitused
2.1. Pooled kinnitavad, et:
2.1.1. raamlepingu sõlmimisega ei ole nad rikkunud ühtegi enda suhetes kehtiva seaduse,
põhikirja või muu normatiivakti sätet ega varem sõlmitud lepingu või kokkuleppega
endale võetud kohustust;
2.1.2. nad on oma majandustegevuses iseseisvad ja et ükski pool ei vastuta teise poole poolt
endale kolmandate isikute ees raamlepingu või hankelepinguga võetud kohustuste
täitmise eest;
2.1.3. et neil on seaduses ettenähtud piisav õigus- ja teovõime raamlepingu ja hankelepingu
sõlmimiseks ning nendest tulenevate kohustuste täitmiseks ja õiguste realiseerimiseks;
2.1.4. nende poolt raamlepingu allkirjastanud isikutele on antud piisavad volitused selle
sõlmimiseks kooskõlas seaduste, põhikirjade või muude normatiivaktidega.
2.2. Poolte esindajad kinnitavad, et neil on kõik õigused ja volitused sõlmida raamleping esindatava
nimel ning nad ei tea ühtegi takistust raamlepinguga võetud kohustuste täitmiseks.
3. Raam- ja hankelepingute tõlgendamine
3.1. Pooled järgivad raamlepingu ja hankelepingu (antud punkti kontekstis ühiselt nimetatud ka kui
leping) täitmisel ja tõlgendamisel järgmisi põhimõtteid:
3.1.1. lepingu jaotiste pealkirjad ei määra nende mõistete ega sätete tähendusi;
3.1.2. lepingus, kui kontekst seda nõuab, võivad ainsuses olevad sõnad tähendada mitmust ja
vastupidi.
3.1.3. pooled käituvad teineteise suhtes heas usus ja mõistlikkuse põhimõttest lähtuvalt;
3.1.4. pooled peavad mõistlikuks seda, mida samas olukorras heas usus tegutsevad isikud
4 / 11
loeksid mõistlikuks;
3.1.5. mõistlikkuse hindamisel arvestatakse lepingulise suhte olemust ja lepingu eesmärki ning
vastava tegevusala praktikat, samuti muid asjaolusid;
3.1.6. kahtluse korral tuleb väljendeid, millel võib olla rohkem kui üks tähendus, mõista viisil,
mis sobib kõige rohkem lepingu olemuse ja eesmärkidega;
3.1.7. lepingu tingimust tuleb tõlgendada koos lepingu teiste tingimustega, andes igaühele neist
tähenduse, mis lähtub lepingu kui terviku tähendusest ning poolte omavahelisest
praktikast;
3.1.8. lepingu tingimuste tõlgendamisel eelistatakse tõlgendust, mis muudab lepingu tingimuse
seaduslikuks või kehtivaks;
3.1.9. vastuolu korral lepingu ja / või selle lisade erinevate sätete vahel tühistab hilisem säte
varasema ning üld- ja erisätte vastuolu korral kohaldatakse erisätet;
3.1.10. pooled juhinduvad omavaheliste suhete reguleerimisel lepingust ning lepinguga
reguleerimata küsimustes Eesti Vabariigis kehtivatest õigusaktidest;
3.1.11. kui mõni lepingu säte osutub vastuolus olevaks Eesti Vabariigi seadusega või muude
kehtivate õigusaktidega, ei mõjuta see lepingu ülejäänud sätete kehtivust;
3.1.12. lepingu tõlgendamisel lähtutakse poolte ühisest tegelikust tahtest, isegi kui see erineb
sõnade tavapärasest tähendusest;
3.1.13. kui poolte ühist tegelikku tahet ei õnnestu kindlaks teha, tuleb lepingut tõlgendada nii,
nagu teise poolega samasugune mõistlik isik pidi lepingut samade asjaolude esinemise
korral mõistma;
3.1.14. ühegi poole mistahes viivitus, hoolimatus või keeldumine teist poolt lepingutingimuste
täitma sundimisel või muude nõuete esitamisel ei kujuta endast selle poole mistahes
lepingujärgsetest õigustest loobumist.
4. Raam- ja hankelepingute ulatus ja maht
4.1. Raamlepingu tähtaeg on 24 kuud alates selle sõlmimisest.
4.2. Hankelepingud kasutusrendiks sõlmitakse 48-kuulise rendiperioodiga. Kasutusrendi korral on
tellija kohustatud tellima lisaks täishooldusteenuse paketi.
4.3. Täishooldusteenuse kestus on 48 kuud.
4.4. Raamlepingu kehtivusajal selle alusel sõlmitud hankelepingu tähtaeg võib olla raamlepingu
tähtajast lühem või pikem
4.5. Tellijate poolt sõlmitavate hankelepingute maht on piiratud raamlepingu eeldatava maksumuse
täitumisega.
4.6. Raamlepingu sõlmimiseks täitja esitatud pakkumuses sisalduvad ühikumaksumused (asjade ja
teenuste hinnad) ei tohi suureneda.
5. Raamlepingu täitmine
5.1. Printerite ja selle lisade ostmiseks või rentimiseks esitab iga tellija täitjale läbi e-kataloogi
tellimuse (edaspidi nimetatud tellimus).
5.2. Tellija määrab riigihangete registris isikud, kellel on õigus raamlepingu alusel tellimusi teostada.
5.3. Kirjalik hankeleping sõlmitakse alates 20 000 euro (ilma käibemaksuta) või suuremate tehingute
korral. Kirjaliku hankelepingu eritingimused genereeritakse e-kataloogis ja allkirjastatakse
5 / 11
poolte poolt. Kui hankijal ei ole võimalik e-kataloogis lepingut genereerida, siis kasutab hankija
raamlepingu lisa 3.
5.4. Kui kirjalik hankeleping on genereeritud e-kataloogist, lähtuvad pooled järgevast:
5.4.1. Kirjalik hankeleping sisaldab vähemalt viidet hankelepingu aluseks olevale
raamlepingule, poolte andmeid, asjade nimetust ja kogust, tootekoodi, hinda
(käibemaksuta ja käibemaksuga), tarneaadressi, kasutusrenti ja täishooldusteenust,
(kui need lisanduvad) ning garantiiperioodi (kui see erineb hankelepingus
fikseeritud perioodist);
5.4.2. Kirjalikule hankelepingule tuleb lisada vähemalt: tellimuse number, kontaktisiku
andmed (vähemalt: nimi, telefon, e-mail) a) kauba vastuvõtja b) hilisem kontakt, kes
tegeleb nt kulutarvikute jms. Juhul kui kontaktisikud kattuvad, siis piisab ühest
kontaktisikust.
5.4.3. Kirjalikule hankelepingule võib lisada vastavalt tellija valikule muid asjasse
puutuvaid lisasid, nt maksegraafik jne. Samuti vastavalt tellija valikule võidakse
kasutada etteantud asja üleandmise-vastuvõtmise akti (näidis alla laetav riigihangete
registrist link: https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/5619440/general-
info Hanke alusandmed - Dokumendid - Lisa 9 Akt). Tellijal on õigus kasutada oma
akti projekti või teha näidisaktis muudatusi ja täiendusi vastavalt vajadusele.
5.5. Hankelepingu lahutamatuteks osadeks (ei pea lisama allkirjastatavale hankelepingu
eritingimustele) on raamleping ja nimetatu lisad, sh hankelepingu üldtingimused, üleandmise -
ja vastuvõtmise aktid, pooltevahelised kirjalikud teated ning kõik lepingu muudatused ja muud
lisad.
5.6. Tellijal on õigus jätta kirjalik hankeleping) sõlmimata kuni 19 999,99 euro (ilma käibemaksuta)
suuruste tehingute korral. Kirjaliku hankelepingu sõlmimata jätmisel loetakse hankelepinguks
tellimus, ning raamlepingu lisaks olevad hankelepingu üldtingimused kogumina.
5.7. Hankelepingud, mille esemeks on seadmete kasutusrent, sõlmitakse kirjalikuna sõltumata
hankelepingu maksumusest.
5.8. Tellijal on õigus nõuda raamlepingu alusel sooritatud tehingute eest tasumisele kuuluvaid e-
arveid ühe koond e-arvena. Koond e-arvel võib tellija soovil sisalduda tehingud nii asjade ostu
kui ka kasutusrendi kohta või võib tellija nõuda nimetatute esitamist eraldiseisvate koond e-
arvetena. Koond e-arvel peavad sisalduma kõik hankelepingu üldtingimustes toodud e-arvel
esinevad kohustuslikud elemendid. Juhul, kui koond e-arvel taoline elementide lisamine võimalik
ei ole, siis on täitja kohustatud tellija nõudel esitama vastava informatsiooni Exceli tabeli kujul
igakordselt paralleelselt esitatava koond e-arvega.
5.9. Iga tellija esitab tellimusi vajaduspõhiselt ja vastutab hankelepingute sõlmimise ja täitmise eest
iseseisvalt.
5.10. Raamlepingu kehtivuse ajal kehtivad muutumatult raamlepingus ja hankelepingus sätestatud
tingimused. Hankelepingu tingimused võivad erineda raamlepingu tingimustest ainult juhul, kui
hankelepingu tingimused on tellija jaoks raamlepingus sätestatud tingimustest soodsamad.
6. Raamlepingu rikkumine ja vastutus
6.1. Pooled vastutavad raamlepingust tulenevate kohustuste rikkumise eest iseseisvalt, välja arvatud,
kui rikkumine on vabandatav. Eeldatakse, et rikkumine ei ole vabandatav.
6.2. Kohustuse rikkumine on vabandatav, kui pool rikkus kohustust vääramatu jõu tõttu.
6.3. Täitjad vastutavad kõikide isikute eest, keda nad kasutavad oma lepingujärgsete kohustuste
täitmisel.
7. Raamlepingu ülesütlemine
6 / 11
7.1. Raamlepingu korralise ülesütlemise õigus on ainult Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia
Keskusel.
7.2. Korralise ülesütlemise etteteatamistähtaeg on vähemalt 90 (üheksakümmend) kalendripäeva.
7.3. Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskusel on õigus raamleping erakorraliselt üles
öelda ilma etteteatamistähtajata järgmistel juhtudel:
7.3.1. täitja suhtes, kelle osas on raamlepingu alusel sõlmitud hankeleping erakorraliselt üles
öeldud;
7.3.2. täitja suhtes, kes on oma lepingujärgsed kohustused üle andnud kolmandale isikule.
7.4. Raamlepingu ülesütlemine ei mõjuta sõlmitud hankelepingute kehtivust. Täitjal ei teki tellijate
vastu raamlepingu korralisest ülesütlemisest tekkinud kahju hüvitamise nõude esitamise õigust,
nt saamata jäänud tulu.
8. Aruandlus
8.1. Täitja on kohustatud esitama hanke korraldajale (Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia
Keskusele) hankelepingute osas järgnevad andmed:
8.1.1. Hankija andmed, lepingu number ja sõlmimise kuupäev.
8.1.2. Andmed, kas tegemist on ostu- või rendilepinguga ning viimasel juhul ka rendilepingu
tähtaeg.
8.1.3. Ostulepingu puhul lepingu maksumus ja kõik lisanduvad maksumused (sh
täishooldusteenuse maksumus).
8.1.4. Rendilepingu puhul lisaks ühe kuu maksumus (sh täishooldusteenuse maksumus).
8.1.5. Andmed raamlepingu maksumuse täituvuse kohta (st sõlmitud hankelepingute/tellimuste
täitmise kogumaksumus).
8.2. Andmed esitatakse hanke korraldaja sellekohase teate saamisest hiljemalt 10 tööpäeva jooksul
hanke korraldaja poolt etteantud vormis.
8.3. Edastatud andmeid kasutatakse järgnevate hangete ettevalmistamiseks ja/või seaduses nõutavate
aruannete koostamiseks.
9. Kolmandad isikud ja nõuete loovutamine
9.1. Pooled ei või oma lepingujärgseid kohustusi üle anda kolmandale isikule.
9.2. Pooled võivad loovutada hankelepingust tulenevaid rahalisi nõudeid kolmandatele isikutele.
Pooled on kohustatud teineteist nõude loovutamisest viivitamatult informeerima.
10. Lõppsätted
10.1. Raamlepingu tingimused on avalikud.
10.2. Raamlepingu muutmise õigus on Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia Keskusel.
10.3. Raamlepingu muudatused vormistatakse lisana või e-kataloogis asjade muutmisavalduse
kinnitusena vastavalt lisa 1 punktile 3.5). Raamlepingu muutmine ei mõjuta sõlmitud
hankelepingute tingimusi.
10.4. Raamlepingu ja hankelepingu täitmise keel on eesti keel.
10.5. Raamlepinguga seotud vaidlused lahendatakse läbirääkimiste teel. Läbirääkimiste tulemusel
kokkuleppe mittesaavutamisel lahendatakse vaidlus Harju Maakohtus.
10.6. Raamleping allkirjastatakse digitaalselt.
7 / 11
Tellijad
(allkirjastatud digitaalselt)
Riigi Info- ja Kommunikatsioonitehnoloogia
Keskus
Ergo Tars
Direktor / volitatud isik
Täitja
(allkirjastatud digitaalselt)
ABcom Kaubanduse Osaühing
René Randrüüt
Juhatuse liige
8 / 11
Raamlepingu nr 5-3/24-0026-1
Lisa 1
TEHNILINE KIRJELDUS
Tehniline kirjeldus (vastav osa) asub käesoleva lepingu konteineris eraldi .doc failis.
9 / 11
Raamlepingu nr 5-3/24-0026-1
Lisa 2
HANKELEPINGU ÜLDTINGIMUSED
Hankelepingu üldtingimused asuvad käesoleva lepingu konteineris eraldi .doc failis.
10 / 11
Raamlepingu nr 5-3/24-0026-1
Lisa 3
HANKELEPINGU ERITINGIMUSED
Hankelepingu eritingimused asuvad käesoleva lepingu konteineris eraldi .doc failis.
11 / 11
Raamleping nr 5-3/24-0026-1
Lisa 4
PAKKUMUS
Pakkumus asub käesoleva lepingu konteineris eraldi .digidoc failis.